Sie sind auf Seite 1von 223

SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

BY

GEORGE PHILLIPS,

D.D.

PRESIDENT OP QUEENS' COLLEGE CAMBRIDGE.

THE THIRD EDITION,


BEVISED AND ENLARGED.

CAMBRIDGE': DEIGHTON, BELL, & CO,

LONDON: BELL & DALDY.


1866

LONDON
-

IT.

WATTS, CEOWX

CGTTBT, TEMPLE. BAE.

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION,

THE

following "Elements of Syriac

Grammar"

are

intended for the assistance of those Students in He-

who

brew,

are desirous of extending their studies to

the Syriao language.

This object

may

complished in consequence of the close


exists

be easily ac-

affinity

between the two languages, both in 'their

which
struc-

ture as well as in the multitude of words which they


possess

in

common.

By bestowing

therefore a small

portion of time and labour on the study of Syriac, the

Hebrew

scholar will be sure to obtain a moderate

knowledge of the
allied to

after

may

subject.

It is indeed so nearly

Hebrew, and especially

to Chaldee, that

he has read the Chaldee parts of the Bible he


at once proceed to the
reading of Syriac,

being the case,

it

becomes important that the student

should avail himself of the


Syriac affords

Hebrew;

Such

him

assistance

which the

for the better understanding of

not to mention that by

it

he

will

be

brought to an acquaintance with numerous ecclesiastical

ages,

documents belonging to the early and middle

which

treat of the creed

and practice of the

PEERAGE.

IV

Syrian branch of the church of Christ in those times.

The

Syriac, as a dialect of the

Hebrew, must always

be regarded as constituting a source


information for the criticism of the

By an

of valuable

Hebrew

examination of a Hebrew word as

Bible.

it is

used

in this language, essential service has been rendered


in elucidating
of

Holy Writ

many
and

difficult

and important passages

has been the constant practice

it

of commentators to have recourse to Syriac, whenever

the

Text of the Old Testament

fails to establish

satisfactorily the signification of a word.

In such

case every person allows that a reference to Syriac


is

one of the legitimate means to be employed in

determining the sense of a passage; and although


this language is inferior to Arabic in the extent

variety of its literature,

regards

its

much more

it

is

and

nevertheless superior as

intimate connection with the

original language of the Bible.

But the great

claim, as

appears to me, which

it

the Syriac has on the attention of that class of persons, for

whose use

the Syriac

New

this version,

and

this

book

Testament.
its

is

intended, consists in

The high antiquity of

use in the early established Syrian

church, stamp an importance on


assigned to no other

circumstances

it

and

if,

it

which can be

in addition to these

be borne in mind, that the Syriac

PREFACE.

language

is

so nearly the

Palestine in the

many

persons

same as that spoken in

age of Christianity, that

first

by

has been termed the vernacular lan-

it

guage of our Lord,

New Testament

it

must be allowed that the Syriao

possesses a value inferior only to that

which belongs to the

Michaelis,

original.

who

de-

voted his great talents to the study of Syriac, and

an examination, of the Syriac

to

version, has en-

deavoured, in his Introduction to the

when

to fix the period

New

that version was

after bringing forward

many

Testament,

made

existed, either at the

end of the

beginning of the Hecoiul century.

and

its

it

to every critic

more

uftod

than

must

or the

common

reading

must recommend the use of

and tho truth

all

first

it

This great age,

frequent deviation from the

in passages of importance,

and

cogent arguments in

favour of its high antiquity, has inferred that

have

is,

that

it

has been

other sources of critical assistance

together,

Prom

those remarks

able that tho


till

Hebrew

it

will obviously appear desir-

scholar should not rest satisfied

ho has obtained a knowledge of tho Syriac.

afford facility for this attainment

duooment in sending

forth,

was

my

To

groat in*

a few years ago, these

Elements of Syriac Grammar to the public ; and I


rfljoico that tho book, having been favourably received,

A*

PUSVACK.

VI

has afforded

me

satisfactory proof

thai I ho publication

The

has not entirely failed in being useful.


of the

now

first

impression having

ken

tho pleasure of presenting a

taining

many amendments and

Leon made
to the

for tho

nwoml

havft

b.w

which

purpose of adapting tho


to

oil',

Edition, con-

additions,

somewhat more advanced Ktato

literature lias

sold

coph's

Grammar

which

flyriac

now gradually arrived,

In introducing these additionH tho plan of

Grammar has not been


I

may

cite,

first

which

it

and

think

as equally applicable to this rrjmhlimtiou

of the book, the words

tho

at all (listurld,

flic

Edition

employed

whou speaking

was executed,

"

in

(lit!

of the

jtrcfoeo to

manner

in

I have endeavoured to bo

simple in tho arrangement, to account for tho vowel


changes, and tho various inflexions of words by (he

a
operation of very few principles, and to exhibit in a
concise form the general structure of f ho
language"

PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION.


IN

Edition of the Syriac

tliis

introduced a considerable

To make

room

for

it,

Grammar
new

quantity of

have

matter.

the Chrestomathy, which

appeared in the second Edition, has been omitted.

In the course of the

last

twenty years many Chresto-

mathies and Syriac books have issued from the press.

These I consider supply ample assistance to the


student in his early attempts at translation.
the study of Syriac has of late years

doubt an advance in this country,

more persons who

made beyond

at the present timo apply

scholars than

it

appeared to

Edition, which

might in

this

them-

a larger

England could lay

claim to a quarter of a century ago,


reasons

all

There are not only

selves to tho language; but there is also

number of mature

Again,

me that the space

For these

in the second

was taken up with Chrestomathy,


be

much more

introduction of additional

usefully filled

Grammar.

by the

Whatever new

forms or inflexions of words, or whatever

new

eon*

structions have been discovered in the Syriac MSS.,

which have been recently

edited,

I have taken care

to bring before the notice of tho student.

there arc few points of

Grammar which

I think

will not

bo

PREFACE.
Its laws
found touched upon in the following pages.
in
and principles I have endeavoured to develop, and,
with them, to classify the nouns, and to

accordance

in the verbs, and the changes


explain the irregularities
I
inflexion.
which words undergo in the process of
this
trust, therefore, that

new

Edition, since the ele-

former Editions
mentary character of the
whilst the higher parts of
into

it,

Grammar

is

preserved,

are introduced

of
thought adapted to meet the wants
and will also, to some extent, be found

will he

the beginner,
profitable

to the ripor student.

I might have

made

the numbor of
a larger book by greatly inevoasing
book than necessary ought on
examples but a larger
of Grammar
account to bo avoided, and a rule
;

every

may

iu general

bo as well

examples as by twenty.

illustrated

by one

or two

CONTENTS.

ImoDUCTOBY

Tho Alphabet
-

VowolB
Diphthongs
Properties

and changes of Consonants

Clwingos of

Tho

......
.........
......
.........
.......

Observations

flio

Vowels

Diacritic Points,

Ribui
Lines

Ku&hoi and Eukok

..........
..........
......
.......
.........
-----.......
..........
........
..........
........

Marhotono and Mohagyouo


Other

On

Diiicritic

Points

the pronunciation of certain letters, &c,

Acccmt

JPAGK

8
10

H
U
18

20

24
26

28

30
31

32

Method of oxprosHing numbers

33

Heading Eiorciaoa

35

NOUN8
Gander

37

38

Number

40

BtatCHufNouna

43

.....
..........
.....
.

PRONOUNS
Ponwud

Pjroncran*

55

60
50

.......

Demonstrative Pronouns

Relative and Interrogative Pronouns

Pronominal Affixes

Nouns with

nifific,

Example of a

fern,

Numerals and

......
noun with

noun with

Affixes

63
C5

Affixes

C5
CO

Particles with affixes

.71

..........
M
.......

VERBS

gj

OS

Affixes

Example of a

Tenses, &c, of the Verbs |o<n and

73
-

77

.....

84

Paradigm of

^^D

Olworvations OH regular Verbs

Verbs which iwvo a

The

pfuttuwil for

ProHOiit TeiiH<, Ac.

IERKUULAE VKHIW
Verbs

p or

*&

Verbs

o^ or

a nul. luttor

91
-

.......
........
.

'*

...

91

93
94.

Oi)

100

.........
.......
-

&p,

107

107

Paradigm of )ooa

Verbs

10^

CONTENTS

XI

PAOH

The Objective

attached to Verbs

affixes

-115

Paradigm of ]p

11C

Observations on Objective affixes

323

The Verb

125

jJ^with

Affixes

Paradigm of the Verb

12<5

JB^-

129

Doubly Defective Verbs


Qiiadrilitoral

130

Verba

PARTICLES

132

Adverbfl

132

134

PrcpositionH

Conjunctions and Interjections

34

SYNTAX
Syntax of NmniB

135

OloiiHtrud.ion of Adjectives

140

Numerals

143
145

Syntax of Pronouns

155

Verbs
-

Adverbs
Prepositions

178

Conjunction

180

Interjections

Interrogative*

183

}Snallage of PovHons
'

...

...

,,.

Ellipsis

Coltoofction of

184

186
187

SyriftoMotreB

APPENDIX

177

Words

188
100

190

INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS,

TEE TSyriac

language, a branch of the Shemitic family,

was the vernacular tongue of Syria for many ages previously to the Christian Era, and continued to be so
till

Mohammedan

invasion of the

when Arabic was introduced

as the language

the period of the

country,

of the conquerors, and in a short time entirely super*


sodod that which had been heretofore in use.
also

It

was

caUodAramraan, as the country itself had anciently

the designation of Aramc&a or

supposed from
scendants

it

Aram

Aram

probably, as

the son of Shorn,

was peopled.

This

name

by whose

is

de-

scorns to liave

obtained in very remote times, being known to llomer,

who

calls

word

is

found in 2 Kings xviii 26 ; Isaiah

and Daniel il

The

early history of the Syrians

is

but

little

11

known.

of a few particulars, which

be gathered from Scripture,


till

xrm.

With the exception


them

The

the inhabitants ty^w, IL IL 783.

little

may

can be said about

the time they were carried

away

into

tine

It is considered that the de-

kingdom of

Assyria.

scendants of

Ham were the earliest inhabitants of the

country.

The Scripture evidence on

this point rest*

INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS.

on Gen.

It seems that

x. 6, 15, 18.

some time before

that of Abraham,, these occupants began to be supplanted by the posterity of Shorn. This appears from

he Shcmitic names prevalent in the country, when


Abraham first entered it; such as Shcmcbcr, Abimc-

loch, Mclclrizedek, &c.

David, after waging war with

the Syrians, having been successful in

many

battles,

compelled the country to submit to his government.


After the kingdom of the Jews became divided into
two, tho Syrians delivered themselves from foreign
subjection

but only to be made a part of the

Assyrian empire.

it

Sulwcciuontly

Babylonians, then to

passed

rule,

nations.

the

rals, sol

master, was

mado governor

tempted by tho example of

up

for himself,

when,

of King of Babylon and Media,

son,

till

and

his

bis death,

HO on, ilio

whon he

II

who began

nflei*

of .Baby-

brother gene-

after obtaining

some

he took the

title

n continued on tho

succeeded by his
country being ruled by hi family
\VUH

for several generations, Iho last of

chuw,

under

fell

SeleucuH, one of Alexander's generals,

victories over Anligonusand Nieanor,

throne

it

and became more prominent simony the

deatli of his

lon, and,

the

the monarchs of Persia; but

HOOR after the conquests of Alexander,

Greek

gi-cat

to

whom was

to roign u.c. 225,

Antio-

This monarch,

pONHOHsed of great military talents and

beiritf

very

ambitious, soon <m#a#ed in tho dew^u of oxlouding


his kingdom*

Accordingly Lo inuhn-took an

dition nguinut the Vavthiann,

whom

expe-

obliged to

v osi:iiv

moxs.

;;

conclude a peace on very advantageous terms.

lie,

afterwards gained victories in Baetria and India.

In

the year 201 B.C. he entered into a league; with Philip


against. Ptolemy Epiphancs, tho king of

ofMaecdon
Egypt,

lie defeated tho Egyptian general,

covered

all

and

Palestine

Ccjnlosv\ ria.

and

After this

relie.

invaded Asia Minor in the hopr s of reducing it also;


cities had recourse 1o tho
tomans, who
k

hut the free

soon made a declaration of wnr sigimiKl Antiochus,

vanquished him
so

completely

battle was,

lirst

al,

llagin'sisi,

thai

that Syria liecamo a

Such being, in a
try,

at Thermopylae, and afterwards

we might

ftnv

Ilio

issue,

itomftn

words, the history of

of

tlt<*
v
-

provinc<

the- (;<>un-

inter that tho language! would, sifter

the people, hud mingled \rilh (he Persians, partake


of the Persian Idiom;

would ho common

that,

ninny terms und phrases

to both languages;

and

this

we

find is tho ease.


Again, for the same reason, many
Greek and Latin words have crept into the. Syritie,

as

wo

perceive from the Peshito version of the

Testament, but

much

mow

New

especially from writings of a

later date, such, for insf-nnoe, as l,hn Chronicles

of liar-HobrwiiN,

Most

of these words nre nouns,

and some Greek particles are inirocluml; but very


few verbs appear to have a foreign origin. \Ve will
subjoin a few examples of such lewis, both as they

appear

in

the Nyr'wc and

in

tho original.

INTROOTCTOKY OBSERVATIONS.

IVrsum

KjJ

TUTTOV,

worn,

}Lo

rwritwa.

The Arabw

im<l Turkn, tVoiu their

wnnection

witli

tho country, Imvo also cxcrcuwxl an hiflucmoo over the


Tho OrunadoRi too, wore tho mmtm
Ryriru) ]aup;ua{^.

INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS.

of getting some European words, chiefly proper iwmes,

and

titles,

wo

introduced into the Syrian, thus

find

count9
yjoo

\*+\s*

prince, *uz>$c marquis.

The Syriac and Ohaldoo are evidently dialects of


the same language, their differences, which ar<* very
small, consisting nearly as

much

as in grammatical inflexions

tho Preface.

Aram tea, and

1he pronunciation

in

and constructions.

Tho lormer was spoken


the, Bust cm,

the latter in

iu

Sec,

Western

vis?,

iho

in

province of Uabylon, bctwoou the Kuj)liralis and ih


Tigris.

Tho most anoiont Syriao writ ings are said io lx* ihe
apocryphal Letter, which Ahgnr the Icin^ scnf. to
There nro also thosn
Christ, and our Lord's answer.

who
was

thinlc that the original of Si. jMaf(h(i\v*s


writte.n in Syriac.

J3e this as

il

Gospel
is no

may, th^iv

doul)t of the very early e\'isien<<i of a Syrian version

of this and of the other GospHs,


oldest documonli v?u

was most

know

and

it

is

perhaps 1ho

of; for the letter of

likoly wriii<m lon# after

the, ]>eriod to

Ab#ar
whiHi

it refers.

The

Syrians, like

many

other amrienl nations, linvo

laid claim to the invention of letters;

but those

have investigated this suhjoct, supposing the


writing to he a mere, human invention and

who
rt

of

nof.

divine pi ft, are inclined to assign the discovery either


to the Egyptians or IMiuuiic&uiH.

oiau or Cluildoo oluiurtcrH f

1.11(7

JYom
suppose

wore derived, as well as the Aruhiu.

the PhdMiithe,

Syriao

INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS.

(f

The

arc two sets of Syriac letters, tlio one bohi<? a

modification of the other, or both of

common

They are

original.

The former

and Peshito.

is

them

havinpf a

called the EstraiitfHo

found in iho oldest

is
MSS., and in many monumental inscriptions. It
which Assemuni, in his
written in Syriac

P^fH,

same

Bibl. Orient. Torn. iv. p, 378, supposes to 1)0 the

as the Greek

word

<7rpoyyvXo?,

round; but as

romd*

not a characteristic of this alphabet, J. 3).


Michaelis and Adler have sought out another olymoness

is

logy, viz. the Arab, ^k*, a writing

The

latter is

more modem, and

is

and

Josr*) </M/^'/.

the OHO wliioh

generally used by the Maronites and Jacob itos.


origin of these characters is uncertain.

narily assigned to the seventh century,

It

and

is

Tin*
ordi-

is

It is

said

by Jacob of Edesaa. It is
however, that they were gradually dn-

that they were introduced

most

likely,

and underwent several modifications, before they assumed the precise forms which we HOW
veloped,

have.

It is supposed that the Estrangelo IcUors

mm*

employed in copies of the Scriptures, whilst tho LV


shito alphabet, because it could be written with

greater rapidity, was that which

common

purposes of

was hi use

muHt

for th<!

life.

The Nestorians use characters partly resembling


the Estrangelo, and partly the Peshito;
they occupy
as it were a middle place between tho two
and persons accustomed to read these,
may

make out

the Nestorian,

INTRODTJCTOKY OBSERVATIONS.

*7

It lias been very mucli tlie practice of the


Syrians,
since Arabic became the spoken
language of the
it with Syriac letters.
This mode
of writing is called, after the name of the
inventor,

country, to write

Carshunic.

1.

The

Syrians, in

common

with

many

other

Eastern nations, read from the right hand to the left,


and have the same number of letters, which are all
consonants, as the Hebrews.

The following Table


powers, and numerical

exhibits their forms, names,


values.

INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS.

It appears from the forms of the letters exhibited


in page 8 that all of them except 1 9 a o }
a L
^
may be joined to the following letter of the word,

and that the nine

letters

^*

a & +

4 -

termi-

nating a word, receive a slight additional stroke, and


* *
-*
*& ^ -*
are written
The five

io

i>

alter their figure at the

assuming the forms ^ 3

^,

end of a word,

>o, r or ^, ^.

Oaro must be taken to distinguish between the


following letters, which have nearly the same figure,

and

differ chiefly in their

=>

magnitude,

>

i>

'

a
It may be also observed that one letter is joined to
another by a small horizontal line drawn from its

extremity

as, 01

in <jiX

The exceptions to

this are

which when joined to another


4
assume the forms *&\ and &..

>

and

L)

The following compound


used.
Olaph-Lomad

Lomad-Olaph

Lomad-Lomad

As

of the

letter

characters are frequently

^
p

for

^|

1^

same

organ are frequently


changed for one another in the process of derivation, Grammarians have divided the whole Alphabet
letters

into classes according to the organ of speech

they arc enounced.

by which,

VOWELS.

1Q
Gutturals

Linguals

The consonants
j. (?.

lose their

tho Hebrew

power

*-

Labials

Palatids

Dentals

**

01

ic

'

o -, frequently b<JConw(|iiicsc><Mii,
as consonants ; as is the csiso wit h

'

2,

Vowels.

It is probable that the quiescent

Him

used in the early stages of tho lanfjua*^? as

\v<w

o *

vw\'K

and were the only vowels which in those linios urrc


known. The consequence was that many words woiv
not sufficiently defined in writing, and that a vowel

\v

as

and had to be supplied hi ftpttakhitf.


which existed at one period or
another in the whole family of the Rhumilfc lancame gradually into
guages, a system of punctuation

often understood,

To meet

use.

this defect,

Tho

first

step taken to

moot tho wanis of

llu*

reader was tho introduction of a point, which by UN


position, above or below a word, indicated tho proper
vowel. Tho employment of it, howover, was
vory partial, and its primary object, perhaps, was Jitlio mow
than the determining of those words whtoh, without
it, would be ambiguous.
(Soo Appendix.) When this

point was

first

now impossible
assigned

although

its

introduced into the written


Hyriuo
to ascertain.

Many Grammarians

invention to the school of

historical

testimony on

ikfe

Edmsa
nmUer is

it is

luivu
;

Intj
vifi-v

VOWELS.

we

imperfect,

11

arc nevertheless inclined to go back to

a more remote period.

It is pretty certain tliat

something equivalent to

it,

it,

or

must have been employed


and perhaps much

in the third or fourth century,

before that time

for

Ephraim must have found some


comment

note of distinction in Gen. xxxvi. 24, in his

on which he says
*

|J

^JLi]

,-1*2+]

ofnajj

Jjf is

y*]

proper

]^ol

1*

lfi*>

o-^o

to observe', ttatf

in both Testaments,

and not

j{{

Ipc**, as

wow?

we find

some persons

have ignorantly thought. In this observation, Ephraim


must have had some mark whereby he could distinguish ]-^Oi* from ]-fifi*; and it is likely, if we had

works older than those of Ephraim, we should be able


to recognize a

mode

of distinguishing in

them the

moaning of one word from that of another consisting of


the same consonants, and that mode would probably
be by the point we are here speaking of. It is quite
clear, however, that had this point been as extensively
capable of being, still it would be
for which it was
quite inadequate for the purposes
intended. The precise vowel could not be known by

employed as

it is

such a mark ; and hence Grammarians


to

work

to devise

set

themselves

some other method of more

defining the sense and pronunciation of words.

fully

Now

the Greek language and literature were much known


to the Syriac scholars of the time to which we have
referred,

and

their attention having been brought to

the imperfect condition of their vowel system; and,

VOWELS.

12

been able to observe the accuracy


the Greek, they perceived that its vowel H might

further, having

01
be.

own
advantageously engaged in the service of their
said
ihe
of
modes
Two
representing
language.
vowels were adopted about the same time: on o was
by means of one or two points being placexl in different positions, and the other by writing above, or
below the consonants the Greek signs themselves, \\ it h

some

slight

change in their forms.

This 8y,slem of

punctuation was originated by TlieophihiH of Odessa,


according to Assemani (see hisBibl. Orient. Tom. r.
p.

64),

and was advanced step by step

brought to its present state of porfoction.

it

till

was

Theopli Hits

died about the year 791 of our era.

Vowels, by native Grammarians, are called Hometimes by one and sometimes by another of lh follow-

ing names
sounds;

vocals

]&liSo

luo positions ;

The following Table


and forms

]Q]

motions

\pvipoints.
exhibits their names,

Names.

Power.

Figure.
Syr.

Petliocho

ftovotso

OLovotso

EtSOtso

o
o

ja

^D

ooo
t

Zekofo

Greek.

9
OD

CO OD

Alpha (A)

lota (j)

OD

Omionm(0)
UpHlldti* (Y)

* Tho
figure of the vowel Msoteo tuny luivo come from that of the
diphthong ov. Tho forni of tlio vowel in frcijuimtly oln^mnl in MSH.
^

to bo

V.

13

VOWELS.

The points

of the vowel Zekofo

the point of the letter

The vowel Etsotso

coalesce with

may

as ~-^<n>" Roli-t'm.

>,

always accompanied with o

is

^o

except in the two words

ir>

cul, ****&, metul.

When no vowel is expressed, then, as in the Hebrew,


a Sheva (quiescent or
and read accordingly.

moveable) will be implied

Vowels may be divided into two classes pure,


those which complete their syllables impure,
:

i.

e.

i. e.

those which do not complete the syllable without the


addition of a terminating consonant,

Pure Vowek are


as

Wlion

followed

a quiescent

by

or
h.

as

p^a

*"*

ICtlw-bo,

Impure Fowek are


7
,

as in

cad.

Men.

id-to.

as in
syllables are often,

Hebrew,

of the accent;
lously long, on account perhaps

as,

DIPHTHONGS.

VOWELS.

14
n,

also -*fc

m-

where

occurs with two consonants, so

3.

Diphthongs*

There are several diphthongs made,

Vauand Yud, which, losing

their

own pou ers,

with the preceding vowel and form one

Vau makes
The

first

four diphthongs

OH,

Ihe
\&o$ iMnt-uw,

,/f/-v/,

w-n

is.

Tho seconds

cu<> is

third, to, "by

'

produced}^ i\w vowel

I will

a.; as ^cna*2U,|j HsU-teii,

Tho

syllable.

cm, en, in

produced by the vowel 'preeedinu-

is

as, ^joc| aiirkely liefed^

ho-nau, this

eojilesee

occurs at tho beginning middle and end

of words, and

o;

Hie letters

l>y

pr<mlinv

flriufc If.

a cncvotso pvooodin^;

UH, *oia

7
7*<?

wiM

s%

ftim

^cnaJ^,
n'tJuuMit, Iw mil
a*

him.

The

fourth, ow, is

when a

radical o

is

preceded

I,v

another o with

>>

as,

^OQA

8fiOM-(fa-yo 9

Yud makes two diphthongs, f^'and

ol

pwunw*

<d

*;

as,

Zu-\^#'to^,

</^^ Aff^

wwaled:

ol

before

l>v
*

^7

"

by

before

as, ^01 Iwi, she.

4.

Properties nnd Changes of Consonants

Consonants possess various properties and


undergo
certain changes arising from tho inlluemw of vowels,
or other causes,

The

letters

which we proceed to mention.


o -, when
they are not

^!

PROPERTIES AND CHANGES OP CONSONANTS.

15

but rest in the sound of the vowel on the preceding


are called quiescent.

letter,

Olapli final rests in" or *; as,


the

men

jp^fA* mem,

except in a few verbs, such as

:
7

')

polluted, V

7?

lie

comforted, |K
^

lie

polluted,

IfaL

\\&L] lie
A

he

was

decorated.

Olaph in the7 middle of a word

rests in

or

"; as,

^a]i>o to eat,

into Olaph quiescent in

Yud

Tud

cfco to say.

sometimes changed

is

usually rests in

J^D

as,

or

as,

to beget, for

^^o.

*}* he begum,
X

but.

is, ^*>

Vau

deprived of a vowel

escent in

*
;

the fulcrum,

is

as, VOQS rise, >oa*

or, as

lectionis of this

it is

vowel ;

for the

It

day.

most part quiis also used as

technically termed, the mater

^o^J,

as,

In foreign words Vau


*
quiescent in the vowel

is
;

he will

kill.

frequently found to be

as,

uao^La Peter, UDQJO/Z

throne.

The

letters

o * are frequently not pronounced;

but they are nevertheless written for the sake of


orthography or etymology. In such instances these
letters are said to

be

otiose.

Olaph in the pronouns <o2ul and ^M, when they


are added to participles for the sake of forming the
*

present tense,
^fcjif

^b

is

otiose; as, <pta]

kot-loten,

Vau and Yud,

ye

slay,

^-^la kot-litm, and

masc. and

fern.

in certain persons of the verb, are

PEOPBETIES AND CHANGES OP CONSONANTS.

16

also otiose; as, al^Lo Htal> they slac, 3rd. JMTH. plitr.

masc. *-^U>

prset,

prat.

J**4e

fern,

Tud

is

and in

KM,

certain affixes

and adyorbs

1^.

pronoun

iew*. Also in

frm.

sin}?.

-M

;//,

a!SAo

<

as,

plur.

pors.

///,

w///

Mark

//'////

some substantives
V

-*^j

f ln*n f

-*

v.

New Testament paftftowl, John

41

arc

weak

especially the

sometimes

3 (> ;

letter

omitted

^aj for

Uf**

afi,

compound words

particularly in

p,

xx.

rttMKt

as,

^ *af although. The

in

<*wrf

writing
for

^jp

z^l,

mutt for

initial radical

of Hebrew words sometimes altogether di sa incurs


t- ow^, Eel).

TfJKt.

radical doubled,

we have

from ^3.
Vau and

Afy,

and similar ox^rcsKions.

Consonants

thus

MM,

were pronounced in ancient ttin<^


evident from tlie usage in Arabic and Hebrew ; for wi hav<*
'ntM which arc pronounced c/ta/i and aksari\ w !ia\

also in the

WAJ]

3rd

as, *-*!^A sfol, frtntguUlUy,

In the above cases o and


is

slcto,

slay thou, imper.

likewise otiose in the

-asL) Viho-Vkek,
*

as

they

tital,

on many

tlio

occasion** loao one. of

w**, for VAA*

Yud

and the same

Words which have

full off in

an,

middle

them

he jwrwiwtfi

nearly tho same

situations as in

Hebrew, wlu<*h nuiy

bo immediately observed by
inspecting tho
of the classes of verbs
beginning with thoMn
Letters are sometimes added to words for tho wake

of euphony.

Thus, Olaph

is

prefixed to HOMO word*

PROPERTIES AND CHANGES OP CONSONANTS.


beginning with
for

p^u,

Tud

as,

W hand
*

*S*1,
x

t-^lj
* =
'

Olaph

-*J*l
=

is

for

V^Ll

5E

day

SC

In old MSS.

especially

very frequent.

Thus we

fvLi fowio- for f*L.

this addition of the

have

17

&c. for t^-,


x

^^
x x

*$!.
x

Greek nouns, which commence with two consonants, are usually written with an Olaph at the
beginning; but sometimes without; as, UQJL^CO or

07*

Stephen

v?*riH stadium ;
'

]t*s&] spliere
*

scheme.
also in the verbs u*zu

Olaph prosthetic occurs


as, %*&*.]
*

A& drank, and ^a^l he found.


ff*

We

and

A^^> from ^TJS Heb. ^^,


It^s,
seems to be a compensation for the
Dagesh forte in Ohaldee and Hebrew.
A great number of Hebrew words become Syriao

have

where the

also

Nun

by the change of one or more

of their letters.

changed into

>

as,

1JT

gold,

...................

...

ttt

rock,

Itf

...................

...

is

ff

mow,

'

...................

...................

sometimes into

01

..

n^5

or *

..

^revealed,

H^Jl Juwwdered,

CHANGES OF THE VOWELS.

18

5.

Changes of the Vowels.

cases effected

numerous

Inflexions of words are in

selected
by a change of vowels, certain vowels being
word.
same
the
as characteristic of diJQferent forms of

The correspondence between Syriac and Hebrew


vowels

is as

follows

Pethocho

1m

tote

corresponds to Patach

(-)

as,

oa

king.

Revotso
"flp^fl

(')

generally to the

(<*)

thoushalt

visit,

^W,

\z>l,

Chevots6 (*) to the

Hebrew

Hebrew

as, j

//*<w dutlt kill.

TT; as, oo^ or

for fty Esau.

Zekofo

(*)

to

Kamets

as, y^f,

075 #*;*

he revealed.

Btsotso

Kibbuts;

(*)

to Oholem,

as,

jl^,

Kamets Ohatuph,

holiness, tthp

^.,

and

Slmrc^ik

bb,ta

e/U.

Olaph in the beginning of a word, and also Ee in


the same situation, when followed by en, instead of
being according to analogy without a vowel, will
*
receive a vowel, for the most part
or ; as
for

^|

?
.

N^a|

joiik

Tud

for

>n.

observes the

same rule

word, and takes the vowel

at the
as,

beginning of a

t-S*

fie

legal for

The foregoing rule holds good also for the lottm-H


Olaph, Vau and Tud, when they begin a syllabic, the
vowel in such places being remitted to the
preceding

THE VOWELS.

UHANGffiS OF

19

has been previously without one ;


the Olaph, Vau or Tud is followed by
two consonants in the same syllable.
full exhibition of these principles may be seen by looking at
if

letter,

it

except when

the irregular verbs.


When two consonants come together at the beginning of a syllable, as is sometimes the case in the
of a word, in consequence of prefixing

beginning

prepositions or conjunctions not having a vowel ; and


also in the

middle of a word from inflexion; the

former consonant will receive a vowel, for the most


part "T, but also
heaven,

was

}^i^for]l^the

slain,

j/vun

as,

letter,

for

1'vua

tiL>L] for 2&404*fa


This

]fiu*o=*Z glory for l2u*=x*.


*

is analo-

<n

gous to the Hebrew, where the former of two Shevas


coining together in the beginning of a syllable, is
generally changed into

Vowels are sometimes cast away: when another


syllable is added to a word, the final vowel is cast

away ;
it

is

Zjns>

as, Zfjaa

the feminine of *&

But

he visited.

preserved, 1st. if a letter only be added; as,

thou hast visited

the analogy of the

forte; thus

*if

the consonant from

Hebrew ought

yL people;

3rd. the vowels

2nd.

and

to

have a Dayesh

in the definite state


*

are preserved

Zekofo in nouns of the definite

as,

state,

l^L;

^jo,

when

c2

it is

TEE DIACBITIC POINTS, KTJSEOI AND

20

o<n is, is

followed- by

IrtJKOK.

so Hint
changed into Pethocho,
* *
ii

a diphthong with o

may make

it

is

lie

liar, for 001

[1;

o<n

as,

cJoi

w-#-

fl^

lio-u<nt,

thk

to,

i'w

in
Transposition of vowels takes place, imperially

iiounsofone syllable; thus, ia^unw, delinite stale

Many oilier

holiness, definite state )I;ao.

fp^; *ot>

in the Chapter on nouns.


examples will be giycn
*
v
*
*ji
ji
t*
The prepositions xoos and >ojao with the prefix
'

-i

*V

Lomad become V^-pqS and

*
f

>o t ^o^,

and

(terhiin

in

lakes phtee;
particles a iransposition

compounded

JIN

for jlc^ until.

The Diacritia

6.

Kutlun

Point*,

tw<f

The Syrians have no marks exactly


to the Dagesh forte and liaphe of the Jloluwn; hut
they use a point for the letters taaa^,
This point, when it is situated ahoyo a

away the aspiration, and,

when

lotlcr,

placcxi l)olo\v y

In the former case it is called ~.4w AW/w, whicsh

it.

signifies

hardening, and in

softening.

In Manuscripts

latter yvo>

tlie

tluise

liitkok,

poinis arc

made

with red ink.

Kushoi

is

used with the above-mentioned

when any one


l^a^

man.

of

But

them begins a word;

if

one of the

prefixed, then the radical


as,

foi,

letttsrs

te&^z

an

&

letters,

(p ww,
o

l,t-

receives a Itukok

THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KTJSHOI AND RTJKOK.


If one of the letters

o * precedes

the latter takes the sign

=>>

21

one of the

Eukok;

as,

a creature;

If the

first letter

\^*.

The

chosen.

noun be without a vowel,


*

of the

then the second will receive a

**-*>
X

Eukok

as, ]&!.

break-

of tel father, according to Sciadrensis, has

Eukok when

when

a natural father, but a Kushoi

a spiritual father

is

meant.

Of those nouns

See his Grammar,

having

p.

1^.

and

to the first letter,

consisting of four letters, the third takes a Kushoi; as,


*|5o** sin,

l&o a house;

if,

however, the noun be

Rukok

feminine, then the third letter receives

]2p a

daughter,

If the

noun

Ifticf

a female

AJ-^

as,

a garden.

consist of five letters, the third has a

Kushoi, and the fourth a

]\s&&

slave,,

queen,

IOJA a

Eukok

as,

Uasoa a star,

There

generation.

are,

however, a few which take a

Eukok on

the third,

and a Kushoi on the fourth;

as,

a teacher,

1/fd

an

ape,

\L^^o a walk, or

II?-\^D

path,

fiua^io

an

edition.

Again, with respect to nouns, consisting of six


letters, the third takes Kushoi, but the fourth and
fifth

Eukok;

* In
this
is

as,

ILyXo

and the following remarks, when a Kushoi or Eukok

spoken of as attached to a

meant.

candle,

letter,

ZvstSf^

letter

is

always

DIA.CEITIC POINTS, KTJSEOI

THE

22

ftejoi knowledge.
the

fifth

ETTKOK.

few nouns receive Kushoi in

]ftaio/ adcKtioti,

as,

AND

]i*s&i

clothing.

be placed to the second letter of a noun,


If
then the third letter, if it possesses a vowel, will
7

take Kushoi;
if

as,

]?* new, l^a

the letter which follows

the one after this will receive Rukok;

as,

It-p
*

have a Kushoi on the fourth

1^4

1^

heifer,

Pour, however,

lird, iLaoIa revenge, Jftiaco foolish.

folmd,

But

splendour, &e.

be without a vowel, then

t>

via.

letter,

Imping, and

chariot.

The

ceives a

Rukok;

)^1

<?ar9

after

letter

as

When nouns
*,

by

wwg.

finger, 11^5

,/{*>/,

re]j?l

There axe a few exception**,


Sciadrensis.

consist of four letters, the first

the third will take

l^u> a

]i^ a

wisdom.

which are mentioned

be without a vowel,

if it

Rukok;

Exceptions are

hole, lij^ evening, 1'LsJ

ar,

having

]^a^o a wonlt

]**

darkness,

ornament, iL&J hair,

pitch,

If the vowel

be placed on the second loiter of

a noun, then the third letter, if it have a vowel, receives a Kushoi; but if it bo quiescent, then it takes

Eukok;
it

also, if after this

receives Kushoi;

]&^it aplmt,

letter,

as,

there comes another letter,

]is^a vme,

^^a phlegm,

which comes after

)is^
',

whether

it,

has a

THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KUSHOI AND ETJKOK,


vowel or not, always takes Kukok;
X

as,

23

ffJm
^^ victory

]t+=& work, It-ioi^ a disciple; but if another letter


comes between, then the
haoy^a receives Kushoi-*
.
,
a congregation.
as, (fljfa just, ]Zf
.

noun take

If a letter of a

0000

*,

then the

following

one, whether with or without a vowel, has

Eukok-

'

as \n4 good, \*i\Ji uit.

*,

The

letter of a

if it

be

itself

noun which comes

after the

without a vowel, receives a

vowel

Rukok

as, Itacu beauty, ]&o=> first-born; but if the said letter


has a vowel, then the point attached to it fs Kushoi
O

as,

K*|as a coat*

Dagesh, the elision


//

-*3

is

Af

//

<-a,

no compensation
by
indicated by Kushoi; as in
verbs,

letter elided, as there is

and o^ and

their derivatives; as, <omaZ for

^amaaZ ye will slay.

These points serve to distinguish several words


which have the same letters and vowels; as, fpaj
disgrace has

hard,

# heap of corn has


This

is also

and

l^ou pity has

hard, and

Uo^

the case with verbs in

> soft

yoy has

many

fzojl
^ soft.

instances ;

drew him, with


as,
^soft and ? hard, is disfj^
hard and
tinguished from 01^ he struck him, with
OT

>

lie

soft.

In many words, which, have been imported into the


Syriac from the Greek or some foreign language, the
to bo pronounced in
aspirated letters arc accustomed

THE DIACBITIC POINT, BI15UL

24
the same

way

as they are in that

they are derived;


fleoxAyo?,

it&x&t
a

represented by

by o, x by
ccocuumicuLa

diuicliL, %\a/*&,

Xajwnfe:
*s>

and

of the Greeks

by

and f hy unb

^a;

uao^olz,
is

in Syrian

by ^,

by 4

as,

Philoxenus, uao^la

ca

as,

which
language from

According to Amira and other native grammarians,


KusM never douhlcs a letter; but on the other Imml
it

must he

said that the Eastern

Syrians in Ih'm

the
respect followed the analogy of

have

also *Pa/3fll9 Master,

writings of St. Paul

John

iii.

wo have 'Apfa

duplication bo not admitted, then


state that in

such cases where

it

Eelnw.

W<5

and

Uu

2,

Jfittliw.

iji

11*

tins

important to
would bo implied,
it is

the preceding vowel will complete the syllable; thus,

pZ

tab-bar or la-bar.

7.

nouns and verbs have the same form

Many

both numbers.
to

Ribul

In such cases

employ some mark of

it

hi

was found nccxwnary

distinction,

Jb^or

this purpoHu

Grammarians have invented the sign JtUwi (^c&t)


consisting of two horizontal* dots (") plactwl almvo
the word to denote the plural numboi .
1

words

The following

will illustrate the use of this


sign.

Ribui

is

usually placed obliquely ia ii ami Sfc;

thuit,

THE DIACBITIC

POINTS, UIBTJI

5oo,

JSfta

wwe

-^V|
..

noun ending in

of the sign Eibui; since the

cowraZ,

(phi. fern.)

ttwj arrived,

(plu. fern.)

^c

he arrived,

plural

booh.

wu covered,

25

or

<JL

number

dicated by the termination, but

still

has no need
is

already ra-

the sign

is

often

added.
It is sometimes used with a

noun

of multitude ;

00

as,

Of

l& a flock of sheep, to distinguish it from jok a sheey,


If the word taking Bibui haye the letter Bish, one
of the points

commonly

belonging to Bish; as,

with the point

coalesces

]^

Jierd,

|pl

met*.

In

MSB., however, we also find Ip^or lt^


It sometimes coalesces with the vowel Pethocho 3

when it is expressed by points, thus,


7

Moioi&l&i

hisfom-

dalions for ^TLQD|^.

Prepositions with pronominal affixes referring to


plural nouns receive these points

To

this rule there are

as,

^001^ , ^-01^.

some exceptions ;

as,

>oja

and

^i, which are never seen with this sign.


to

some grammarians, do

not receive the dots except

when they are joined


V 6
7
qO
|^Z, ^oau?, ^iu^z m.

The numerals, according


m

to pronominal affixes; as,

<-*>^,

*,

>

26

LINES,

Besides the

name

v*o3$, wliicli is

points, they are also called

given to those

by native grammarians,

l^lo positions, Jso^ drops, &c.

Lines.

8.

A small

sometimes found above and somo-

line is

times beneath a letter of a word.


It is

found above, a letter principally in the follow-

ing instances,
1.

In abbreviated words ;
I

01

2.

for ojoi that

When letters
as,

3.

s^

Particle of Exclamation of

When it is found

(2)

beneath a

It

is

to

particle o] or.
letter, it directs that

Imea occultms.

barth, a dmghter.
(1)

from the

not to be read, and

rally called the

numbers

13.

In the

letter is

is.

are used to express

distinguish it

such

as, *o for \L*tQ holy>

is

therefore gone-

Thus, -ip Balk not

found,

In nouns with the middle radical doubled;


n
07
y
as, lii& manna, {& a hill, |.^s uutions.

With Olaph

in

the

beginning of a \vord

in several instances; as, J*\ a mint, &**]


*
*
9*

mother^ Uf*) laslf especially in tin* pronoun

W,

as often as it is used in the place of the

substantive verb

as, ft

&

LINES.

(3)

"With.

Ddlath when

before

Thau

(4)

With He

(a)

In

27
it

without a vowel

new.

as, liyl*

is

in the following cases,

affixes

^a^o

as u*qirnSsn his kings,

he called Jmn.
(b)

In the verb
or

when

when

was,

loci

redundant3

it is

in forming the imperfect

it assists

and pluperfect tenses;

as,

he

^cnoZu]

|oci

he had ordered.

was ordering )ooi |09


But when it is used in the

sense of to be,

to

was,

yna he

]o<n

exist)

the line

is

not

found.
(c)

In the pronouns

001

and

-oi,

are put for the logical copula

my
(d)

body

when
as,

001

they
**

mn

it is.

In some words which are derived from the


and Hebrew;

Greek
,,

as,

-^cooTi

jRome,

}^o(7u a Jew.
(e)

In the verb ^<ju he gave.

(5)

With

**

in

^i**,

when

it

comes

after

the

active participle used as a present tense;

7*0
^s

as, ,-x^

(6)

we

With Lomad
^ll he went;
<i

create.

in some
as,

l\\

forms of the verb

she went, i$^}\* they


~
*

will go.
(7)

With Nun

in the four pronouns

k/1

<^te],

LINES.

28

^al, and

some nouns;

in

as,

the ship.

<p

Bish in

(8)

When

a lino

<

is

of the imperative

a daughter, and 4>*for 4**9

found under u

mood

implies that such letter

letter

in

a verb

of a passive conjugation,
is

deprived of

its

vowel

ii.

ethkatl

9.

Marhetono an

In many words, when two


each without a vowel, a

lottors

lino is

above and sometimes below the

In the former
making

to run>

(^o

placed

first

Hcnmlinu*N

of tluwn

pliers.

case it is eallod J&xrlwfottu (U^oif&e

from

^<yi5

fc

r),

and

in tlio

latlor

Amim front ^-n


but according to Jlolfnmn and others
from the Arab, U* to connect ; for th hvo Id few ly

MeJwffyono (\L^mxi) according to


to meditate;

this sign are connected


lines

the

and

Tnik<^

a HyllnbJ^,

seem to bo used only in certain words,

first

instance for purposes of poetry.

of the Syrians, as appears from

tlui

remain, (see for instance tho hyinn

Tint

Th(*so
ntid in

pnH ry

Kpocinions \\hla\i
of JSphrnhn,) con-

having a certain number of Hyllablos in


and hence it would bo convenient, u
many WHOM,
to give to some words an additional
To in*
yllabl<f,
sisted in

line

MARHETONO AND MEEAGYONO.

29

dicate this addition, a line

of the two letters

was put "beneath the first


without a vowel, which had the force

generally of Bevotso, hut occasionally of Pethocho


*
*
*
.

0.*

When

l^v* a ring; ]&Xo

i.e.

as, ]hQ\

i.e.

]J^^> fear.

this additional syllable is in such

words not

required to complete the measure, the Marhetono


written, and denotes that

* *

is

and the following


It corresponds to the Sheva in

haye no vowels.

Hebrew, except that the

its letter

latter is

to general rules, whilst the former

employed according
is used only in par-

and in these words only under certain

ticular words,

circumstances.

Grammarians, however, aie'not fully

agreed as to the primary use and signification of these


lines,

and

cannot

it

is

make

not

now

of

much

consequence,

if

we

ourselves folly acquainted with them.

by some persons, that the Mehagyono


found only when the following letter is > ^ ^ >o ^;
but to these, others add 01, others -*, and others
It is supposed,

is

* o

Again, whether every word which has one


must, in a different situation, have the other;

).

line,

or whether some words have only one of the lines

and others only the other, it is impossible to say,


and happily it is not important to determine, Whoever is curious to know more of this subject, may
by consulting the chapter
in the Syriac Grainmar of Sciadrensis,

have his curiosity

on these
in p.

lines

satisfied

OTHER DIACRITIC POINTS.

30

10.

Other Diacritic Points.

It has boon stated, in pngc 10, thai- n point \ins

sometimes used which, by its position either abov*' or


below the word, would dotormiuo the true pronunciation and meaning; when "without it and without Ihe

vowel points,
(ni>
A

it

would ho amWgomtH: thus, <*&

to Jim; ou* for

oiJL to li<n\

It

is

used as a note of Interrogation, Exelnwation,


tion,

Command,

&a

for

also frequently

Admira-

a further aceounl of

]?or

various offices which this

this

performs, m\\ the

j>oi)il

Appendix.

There are also certain signs for marking ihn wul of


a sentence, and subdividing it into clause**, of which
the following axe tho principol,
(1)

(2)

At the end of a

section or parajjnijjh are

found four points

(*)

Two

or

(;:),

points placed obliquely from the

hand towards the

left,

finish

elfins,

and are equivalent to our colon;


:)4i^^ ^0^4,

^y

l^a

When-

ritfht.

UIUH,

Jt>Hit%

MM

the multitudes.

These points are sometimes put UM a

Hij^n

of

interrogation or exclamation,
(3)

Two
hand

points placed obliquely from the


to the right, thus
(*), Kplit the

Ml

PRONUNCIATION OF CERTAIN LETTERS.


into different members,
to our

comma

31

and are equivalent

or semicolon.

They

are fre-

quently placed perpendicularly (:).


-r written wider the last letter of a word
is

the shortest pause,

viz.

comma;

as,

|]].

These points are sometimes found after a


long interrogation, see Matt. xii, 10.

One

(4)

On

11.

point frequently ends a period.

the Pronunciation of certain Letters

when they are

under peculiar circumstances.

These letters are differently pronounced in different


situations.

Olaph

pronounced as Tud,

is

(1)

When

(2)

When it is

preceded by another Olaph ;

it is

followed by another Olaph with-

out a vowel;

peal;

Vau

as, )jLo

When it is the

(3)

as,

m* lay o, fulness.

second letter of the participle

tso-yem, fasting.

pronounced as v when

is

as,

o
syllable; as, o 00, *o ve, x vi:

it

begins a word or

in other places

it

has

the sound of u or w.

Tud
1

is

its

in the beginning of a

not pronounced.

vowel;

heavy.

Olaph

as,

word with the vowel

It preserves only the

JM* Inek> he sucked ;


*x

Hence we find that before a


is

sound of

v^x Hwr* he was


Yud of that kind

sometimes placed, and the vowel belonging

ACCENT.

32
to

theYud

is

transferred to llw Olajih; ilius, 1^

from the Hebrew T,


*

liand,

word

when
9

as,

by a

Eukok

loiter

with link ok, or

or Kiushoi,

is

l>y

pronouum!

**A0 f

Uy^geatho, wool; li

after it;

that

liki*

Isuoj ^Aj/b,

as,

like i; as; Ifisu clwsdJiOi

If z with a

#m#.

rr

o,

>^

mewy ; J^\

Bukok

coin

these letters has the force of

MMtiiwwL

//<'

o pronounced wln*n vj

is

followed hy one of the loiters

plied.

Tlio promnu'iutiim

&c.

+>

Some persons add


comes

\\V Ias<*

the same*

followed

either with a

d&;

is

W-

written

r%,

also ]-<pA glory, liaicul

of either

is

;i

iii'tcr

^o wlirn

is

f/tf/t,

//<>

or u& 9 rat'h of

as

12.

Grammarians have given a

fw

ruf<\s

for

the Accent,
1.

In words of two

syllables,

if

tlm

lirsf

terminate in a consonant without a vowl, this


ble has the accent;

?is,

\ltel ythu-#/Wt

<'/"<"//

SN II;u

l^r\.

/////

gdtvno, tone.
2.

If

on the contrary the

iiuul Ictlor of tint

be without a vowel, then the oum&t


second syUable;

conmmdwff.
manner,

still

as,

i~l6d,

is

ho faynt;

is

aflbctal

with

(iu

^ jw-M,

If oach syllable bo formal

the second

uonl

pnf on

llu*

in

thai,

METHOD OF EXPRESSING NTJMBEBS.

33

Zfaa pek-ddth, she has visited.

as,

The

accent is also

placed on the second syllable in nouns ending in


as, aa.Vf>.

o;

In words consisting of more than two syllables,


is generally
placed on the penultimate;

3.

the accent
.*

? o

e>

as, lA-u^a po-rdch-to, bird; ]2L^oa)^o


*

,*

|Zau^o

mart-yo-nu-tho, admonition.

13.

It

me-khul-to 9 meat;

is

The Method of expressing Numbers.

found in Syriac writings that numerals are

more frequently expressed by the


alphabet than by numeral nouns.*

of the

letters

In Section 1

the

It
numerical^ power of each letter is given.
reference
to
the
table
by
exhibiting the
forms &c. of the letters, that the first nine numerals

will be seen

are represented
decads,

I. e.

by the

first

nine

letters,

and the

the numerals 10, 20, 30, &c. to 90, by

the nine following letters, viz. those from ^ to


^.
The remaining four letters *o, 5, -*, Z, represent
respectively 100, 200, 300,

and 400.

The Hebrews

use the final letters for expressing 500, 600, &c., to

The

however, employ a different


notation. They put a point over a letter representing
a dccad, viz. 10, 20, &c, and the effect of this point
900.

is

Syrians,

to multiply the numerical

power of the

letter over

* I have been informed


British

by Dr, W. Wright^ that in the MSS. of the


Museum, down to about the ninth or tenth century, a series

of arithmetical figures

is

employed to express the numerals.

METHOD OP EXVKKSSlXd NTMIUMSS.

34

which

Honor

placed by 10.

Hence

&o.
us

it is

also <J

800 and j

U=

*s>

500,

&

100,
000,

!>oo,

700,

'*,

900.

In order to express thousands, nn oblique lino is


drawn under a letter from the loft hand tounrcls tin
1

right.
will,

The number

of units, which

with the said line under this

number of thousands

we

*-

denotes,

show the

loiter,

havo, therefore,

o - 2000, sv = 3000,
\

the, Jotter

1000,

HOOO,

0000,

Ac.
Letters having a horizontal lino subjoined, n^rrscnl

tens of thousands, i.e. this

number

indicated by this lector

by 10,000.
1

is

donates ihnt

th

<o bo multiplied

Hence,

= 10,000, J3 = 20,000,

ca 200,000,
jp

feo

c^

300,000, ys

000,000, faOBs 1,000,000,

o,

lino

M 00,000,
400,000,

M 2,000,000. &?.

***

^
. .

-s

ll*0,00i,

,VKi,0(t<

^O/IO^MH),

Decads of millions are expressed by moans of two


oblique lines placed under a letter; thus, ) -10,000,000,

20,000,000,

3,000,000,000, /
*\

s,

>

-V

30,000,000 T

drawn from the

over a letter;

^
^V

4,000,000,000.

by means of an
hand lo the* rijjh<

fractions are roprcsentod


lino

loft

as,o^ J,

^-

J,

|,

_^'

obliqitr*
f

pliiood
fiftf

^c,

In the composition of units, decads, liiuulrcdH, &.,


the letter which exhibits tbe
groats immlxtr is
placed on the right band; that which KfnmlH for llm

HEADING EXERCISES.

35

^o =

^=

351,

Both in MSS. and printed Looks

it is

less

number on the

oaa]

= 1866.

left; as,

43,

usual to draw a horizontal line over letters


expressing
a numeral, to indicate the purpose for which the said
letters are

employed
14.

as,

J>

VI.

913.

eve

N^^L^D

= 72.

Reading Exercises.

MATTH

^*

Ia

JA^3

^D ^3

Pf

^^Z

pOkCd^

)JO

TAe same in ErtgU&h Characters.

A-bun d'vash-ma-yo neth-ka-dash

sh'moc,

Ti-the

mal-ctl-thoo neh-ve tsev-yo-noc ai-ca-no dVash-ma-yo


oph-bar-o.

Hav-lan lach-mo d'stm-ko-nanyau-mo-jio.

Vash-buk Ian chau-bain ai-ca-no doph ch'nan sh'vakn


Tcha-yo-vain.

men

V'lo tha-lan Tnes-yu-nd, e-16 pa-tson

b5-sho me-tul

d'dl-loc hi mal-cu-tho

v thesh-buch-to Tolam

LUKE XXII.
0001

63

65,

A=^O ^>aA^

77

o ocai

v'chai-16

'61-mIn.

ooai

f*tf
M^CO

-^ 0001

7
.

cn-i 0091

HEADING EXISKC1SKX.

30

TIte

same

English Character*.

van
Tgav-re da-chi-dm
hvau
beh, yam-clia-pon
let

'al

a-pau vom-rin

ron-yo-tho
'a-lau.

1'yc-slui

sa-gi-yo-ilio

vnti

Viiio-clu'u,

IIVHU

jna-nu in'choc.

Varii-

loh.

cth-im-lK")

in'-vax-cliin

m'gad-plu

hvau

NOUNS,

THE

15,

simplest forms of nonus arc those which

consist oiily of the letters

r&D

king,

woj

composing the root ;

as,

Such words arc


evidently

sacrifice.

in their primitive state,

The augmented forms

consist

of the root
aug.

mcniecl by one or more of the letters

which to

assist (ho

**DD

diMiple from

<(%

altar from

^^

]>rimitivo

the

which

to

socond,

are

aa,

with tho

first radical,

nww8 s

Two words
aa, |k

zp

sacrifice;

qualifies

that of the

tlioy are united,


first

generally

radical,

nouns

and (ol)

signifying

I^OM; & friend; whilst those having (ol(

persons;

ufalraot

called

"be

al)l)rcviations of words,

Nouns having (~) with the


with

or ending in o

as, ji>o0 holiness,

are sometimes

a word.

ZoJL, J/oJl,

as,

are

]iQ^s^9trenffth.

compounded in sense

Sometimes tho two ^ords ara


00

joined l.ogether

eMMy.

z,

to, followed.

them

signification of

word

<-MS?

adhered

lie

Those letters are probably

and the

Thus,

memory may

o ** >o

PO^D

lord of enmity,

o.

A great number of compound words occurring

in Scripture

may be found by referring to the Lexicoa^

NOUSS.

38
of

under tho words

and Castell

Soliaaf

G'w/cr.

16.

Tliore are

two genders,

masculine and feminine.

tlie

Of the masculine are,


names of men and
(1) The

lu>

cttosai IiitAC)

Names

(2)

^13 Canaan,

and mountains;

^i^ou Jorflmt.

lyendor are tho nsimoH

women, islnndn, cities,


members of tlio human "body,

V*a* praise, o=u^ goodness,

),

o, **

Z;

<-^oZ coiifiwuM, tilo


J!

(t.

going

known by

also

is

These terminations an?

the termination.

The nouns not

aj9er^.

ofwomni,

and names of

The feminine gender of nouns

as,

as,

offices of

the double

office's

JJW'W?, Iflq uiMUWtt*

i'

Of the feminhie
the

their

of nations, rivers,

as,

fcl,

letters,

ending? with

and not included

ol'ihe for*-.

any

the {>rwedin>

in

paragraph, are generally masculine.

Nouns
with a

consisting of

>o, if

the

first

two

HyllaLloH,

and beginning

of those BylhibUw

in becoming feminine they add another

which

iLlLo
tf

is

next but one before i

Inffh,

as,

'

lt

t'lVs

)ap^

blessed.

Nouns which begin and end vvifh


which consist of four loiters, when they

then

to the

Vlal&o fom. iLnliSo pmiw<lt

V 7

]Zup^

liav

Xekolb,

feuu

NOUXS.
nine, take Revotso

upon the second

that one of the letters

is

* p

39

father^ fern. \L t^+ a mother.

But

the

if

a guttural letter, then the Revotso

Pethocho;

]t+

as,

fern.

letter,

not a guttural ;

provided
as,

]^1 a

noun contain

changed into
an acquaintance, l^aL

]^^

is

9 7 *

fem. Upii> passing.

Nouns which begin with Zekofo and terminate in


U when they bocome feminine take Chevotso upon
3

the second letter;

as,

fem. |2uol worthy


x

l-'oi

',

|lj?

fem. 12u?J flowing.


X

But

they begin with Pethocho and end in }I,


when they become feminine they take Ohevotso upon
if

the second letter and cast


the first;

away the Pethooho from

as,

lln^fem. \&A^elected.
Nouns ending with Zekofo only, and having Pethocho on the first letter, when they become feminine change the Pethocho from the
second;

fem

as,

first letter

1^** fem. Ut2** companion,

il^o

to the
king,

queen, and a few others do not observe

Ifl.-Asn

this rule.

The feminine gender

of adjectives

the masculine by the addition of

the latter;

ending in
as,

-{

Some

thus, la^ good


*-*

from

quiescent convert

it

is
|

derived from

to the end of

masc.

Those

into *^ moveable;

pure, fem.
adjectives

termination;

as,

insert

5^

Yud

immediately before the fem.

small, fem.

jlja^]

Adjectives in ^

NOUNS,

seem always
9

to insert

_^ZA^

masc.

**; as,

]l^ol

from

spiritual,

0*7

obedient, fern, ]*

Tliere are masc. nouns of tlic

stale in ]Z,

clef,

when Z

one

irf

of the radical letters of the noun; as,

]2Ua icw

the other hand there are some nouns with a masv.

which

def, state,

\l>o] way,

omlhy

in the

fcll

**//>,

as,

sword.

lit'i*

Some nouns

common

are either fern., or

On

]lu] o//rr.

are used in

termed common;

such

as,

both genders, and arc ihwvlln>

|ili^

to0z^ \i&

l*AiCA

ffowrf,

&C.

5M7?,

The
same

rules for distinguishing gondor are for

as in

The

Hebrew.

have the same gondor;


rfa^ are maac.

yi^

sixmo words, wluiu occturrin^ in

an,

sind

jmrf tlw

tint i<>sl

0^
t aa A0/%

1BD and

^>)

tfM anl

car///,

iMtlli,

uiul

y>cu

^lc*4 A^/>

fern.

Words

derived from tho

Greek do not

going rules, but generally retain their


y,

own

ohwnu

fore-

tlu*

guilder, a>,

fom.

17.

Nwubvr*

There are two numbers,

tlio

singular

and

th<>

Masculine iiouus mako tho plural number,

plural.*

by adding ^ to tho singular;


0M0&; 2nd. words cndiug in p or
1st.

1-

or i-- and add tho termination

an,

,j
*

p^w<M r-p^
9

throw
aw,

\v

t!w

$4
buy,
.
*

t
i

There

plu.

ure
V

fern,

^Zj^,

throe

^aaic reprobated
cxotnpk'H of tlm iluul ntiuiluT,
V

ulw>

^*t\te and

*5*ic>,

vi/,

NOTTNS.

Nouns

41

gender form the phiral by

of the fern,

the termination 1- into 5-, o and l into


changing
*
*
and - into ^*; as, U-am sfej?, v i>w 0/iyw; aioj
<p,
.

similitude, ^cto similitudes

into

change

plural,
*

<-*3>'.

UQ when they become


placed on the Yau; as,
06*.

Nouns which terminate


x

P7

2u2e portion, I&&Q por-

^35 wt#y, in the plural

tions;

in

A few nouns

I^os5 multitude, plu. jzasy multitudes.

besides the

take

plu. l^oi^ prayers;


f

instead of

take

likeness, plu. I^Q^DJ

Nouns

on the second

]ofu

plu,

Aip,

upon the

as,

Uo^..

first letter;* as,

consisting of three, four,

and

change the

|flu,

*-> s

into t*

on the

first letter

with the vowel

p
,

to the second letter;

}*,

on the

as,

first letter

in the plural receive the vowel

and end

and which

consist of four letters, in the plural transfer

Nouns having

when

as, IZUD* w^w^y, plu. ]ka>*.

Yud and Aleph


first

lloij

five syllables,
* *

Nouns which have

the

UoS^

Others,

and terminating in
they become plural;
with

letter

from

\*sL elect, plu.

and ending with

upon the

letter

immediately preceding.-; thus, ]lf^ Lord, plu, jl^s.


Those nouns which commence with a Mem and
v

have

either

plural receive

Yud

as,

upon the
7

C^m^

on the

first

or second radical, in the

letter

immediately preceding

reprobated, plu.

NOUNS.

42

Feminine nouns consisting of throe, four, and


*
upon th
five letters, which end in L and have
letter before

Tud, in the plural add another


*

"

lo the

it*.**

thus, I2ui**o> spiritual, plu. |ki-*c.

Tud;

are

There

other changes of vowels which

many

nouns undergo in passing from the sing, to (ho plu.,


which will be more particularly noticed in treating on
the const, and

def. states.

Some feminine nouns terminating in U,

insert

in the plu. between the root and termination;


WUttt, }>lu

]1>&\

place, plu. liuaoj;

]ls>09

Other nouns in the masc. or


e f

o9

[ton.

as, (his

a companion, plu. Uoi3;

jzoicl,

There are nouns in which

like

manner;

as,

UN,

lfiu>'c&].

gender insert o

'i

*-*

t>

|iicof
ci

<

////##, plti.

IH

hiHorlcd in

mother, plu. llonicf;

]&!&)

wfW

servant, plu. ltoS|.


'

Many

Syriac uouns liave the masculine form in the sin^. find

the fern, in

tiio

,7

plu.

plural; as, ]&] physician, plu. #orc|;


*

7*

*^a3oa wrowe,

^oi'Zj;

plu.

^ooijoo.

There arc others wliich have the


masc. in the plural;
Jro]

]Lic/ tor,

year, plu.

iZj ^/flrr,

*V*

as,

plu.

fern,

form in

tlio

ing.

|i] 0/^ plu. ^-Ac]'

^ic,

\^

talent, plu.

^14.

Nouns compounded of two words sometime admit a


in the former;
in the latter;
<>

as,

m&ia

mid

as,

as,

),

1*3

4.1

sons of

man

or

mm;

]a:n t !^s.a enemies; and AomotiuKV in


*

'

(d ailg^tors of

word), uvrdt.

|thmil

s<tnu*tiuicH

<

NOUNS.

Some nouns

j^

heavens,

are found in the plural form only;

\^

life,

as,

o] father,

]'*\

as,

water.

Some nouns have a double


fern.

43

form, one masc. and the other

^oo]

plu.

and

^ro|

There are nouns, which admit in the plu. two forms; but in
a different sense;

\lc] maid,

as,

a cubit, the plu.

signifies

is

plu.

"jZoi^DJ;

but when jiicj

]i|.

There are other nouns which are very irregular;


nation, plu. <oiol,

jko

Zp
daughter, ^i5;
~

)kl

Many

house,

^Jio;

son,

]JUp
X

swter, ]ii;f;

as,

^%; jIjQo,

&c.

words of a Greek origin retain the Greek termination

in the plural;

as,

}i^

SfyfAa,

Others terminate in *&o],


of the

termination 09
^uid^fcrj, plu.

OA,

ot9, so

or in uo*_.

18.

us],

l/l&o^o/ SoyfMra.

orua, resembling the

Greek accusative

ijoaa-fclu^ SiaBrjica?,

corresponding to
?;

joo,

plu.

plural;

as,

&c.; or in o_, uaol.,

oiaaojoZS], op^oSofoi; ooo t4JQfls,

corresponding to

t?;

as,

States of Noms.

To the absolute and constructive

states of nouns,

which the Hebrews have, the Syrians add a


the Definite, or, as it has been more generally
the Xhnphatic.

This

is

indicated

by the

third,
called,

termination,

n before
equivalent in general to the article
a Hebrew noun. It happens however that the primary

and

is

signification

many

of this state has been departed from in

instances,

and nouns are found

in the de

state

STATES OF 3IASCVLIXH NOCKS,

44

when only an indef. sense is intended to bo expressed.


The rules for passing from one state to another depend
or i ho
upon the gender, the number,
for
Thirst
or on more than one of those.

fi

either

nal

let

er,

Masculine Nouns,

19.

In the singular number the absolute and constructive states are the same.

The

by iho addition of

definite state is obtained

f to the

end of the

state of masculine

absolute).

Hence

In 1

deimife

nouns and the absolute sfnfe

cif

feminine -nouns have the same form.

Those nouns ending in


the definite the

The constructive

is

|~-

in tho absolute stilly in

changed into

state, plural

]1.

munber,

is

formed by

changing the termination^- of the absolute into *JL

and ^*- into *++


The del plu, is formed from the absolute by <ln linand <-* inlojll. This
ing the termination ^^- into
.

and the preceding

rules will bo illustrated ly

examples^ which will presently follow.


The object of the mnniiulcT of the station
to

ascertain

the clumgcs

of vowels whirh

undergo in tl\eir dilleront Htatos of both

which

\\i\\

numbers;

tho samcs thing, givcm th^ aim. stnle sini?.


num. to find tho vowels and their
in lint
or,

is

position

constr.

and

1st, If

def. states for

both numbers

a word consist of three consonant.* with a

vowel on the second consonant, which

the ease u hit

STATES OE MASCULINE NOTTOS,

45

a very large class of nouns, this form is equivalent to


one of the old forms of segolate nouns in Hebrew. In
Syriac these forms are,

i.

^la

the alternate form of

which
in.

is

x>.^lo

^0^.0

alt.

"

or

^^lo

^.^Qa

11.

^-^lo alt.

^^Lo or

^.^lo

Now whenever the noun in its

primitive form receives a syllabic argument, the


nate form is used; thus,
def.

p^ttuw,

alter-

We

1r=^-

have therefore only to add the proper termination to


the alternate form to obtain the def. state sing, or
the abs. const, and def. states plural.

Thus,

Singular.
Aba. and Oonsti

l)cf.

>*

morning

6oo

servant

wing

captive

body,

mornings

servants

captives

Plural
Conetr.

Eef.
V

77

AT
7

STATES OF MASCULINE NO CNN.

46

In the foregoing examples, that which is marked ( t) comv


on the socond cunvuiimt,
prehends all those nouns having
it to the first in the process of inflexion; such mv
and
1.

remitting

C9 beard.

in the second consonant, but

and remitted to the

The

first.

those nouns which <ak<

we Imvc

In the second example,

2.

The

4.

forms are

Js^

anathema, ^ASU

^io

such

wliosi-

forms

kiity,

fourth example belongs to that class of timms

third radical Oluph, take

covered, have their definite forma

P^

lima.

in

soul.

which are exhibited in the example ]n\y but


*
]ffla

the proper

Vta and

Nouns having the

5.

a guttural or Rish.

and ^,^la; such are

^lo

husband,

is, (hut,

In the third example arc included those nouns

3.

are

last letter is

w, the vowel

trutli

vowel in both places, and the reason of the chants

nouns the

chan^nl to

in inflexion it in

makes

56^,

in tho dcf.

tho

(L.

*Vi

ji^. and ]*i*l, f^j? ami


phi.

{^^

us if from tlu

*>

obsolete form

6.

-^Ji

wehavelikewi.se

^oLo

All nouns of the forms

| f hpA-

as If from

and

la
T

0^4, cMf* month)


K

njt

p*u, and the

be considered as
belonging to tho same chws

p^.

The Yud has

without a vowel

when

Chevotto,
it

begins a word.

nant be a guttural or Rish,

it

thocho instead of

w^

Revotw;

because thi

as,

is

If

niav
*

like,

of mmtiH

th<i

MIVIT

tofc

preceded by tho vowul

month t

^.^

us
'

letter

A0tfrn

STATES OF MASCTJLINE NOUNS.


Such,

the

nouns as

Hebrew

4?

eye, >oo* day, also correspond to

In these the vowel

segolate nouns.

is

in the def. state sing., and all the


changed into
and this new vowel makes a diphthong
with o or u*; thus,
*

states plu.,

!>

Ab. and

f.

Constr.

day.

Plural.
Consti.

Abs.

7V

^<-S

eyes.

2nd. Other classes of nouns are the following.


1.

Such nouns

as admit

no change of vowels in

inflexion] thus,
Singular,
Drf

Abt. and Constr

evil

Consti.

Def.

The vowel Z^q/b


with

this

is

immutable, and therefore monosyllables

vowel are represented by

WAO

as,

oka

look.

Nouns

STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS.

48

having two or more


consonant, or

if

syllables,

if

the penultimate terminate in n

the ultimate syllable be perfect uilluuit the

to this
terminating consonant, also belong

state

may

be referred to

definite state

Finally, nouns which

preserve their vowels

^**^Lo

def.

IL^LO.

^X*

2.

the stay, }1>]

as, |L]

remains in

possess

all

immutable,

/W,

}*G*

cMrmutintti for the

the part* of their inflexion.

either

A few nouns

//?<

vi/s.

of

tins

Uu-im

fullimin;;

^a^^

tiff.

|*l*^ t\^,

appear to eonvsjiond with flu

segolate nouns in
as,

death, Johco winter, ]ic,

the $erpent,]Lti

form of the

it

UN w*l^*l&

Some nouns wanting mi aWluti*

^o^Z disciple.

explanation

clans

Hebrew, but which

carcase, jti] small,

uk.O*0

roally belong to thi<

Monosyllables, the vowol of whIHi

nouns of many sylkl)lo,

tlin last

or

is

of wliich

are exemplified in the following Tablo.

PI

i-fa

(t

is

n<i

STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS.

The noun

son,

makes

in the plural

derived from a different root.


the consonant 01 in the plural

3.

Nouns

of

Also ^cu
thus,

may

is

sons ; as if

it

were

peculiar in receiving

yv>

more than one

in Olaph or Yud,

49

ftj

syllable,

terminating

constitute another class.

Such

are,
Singular.
Def.

Abs and

Constr.

Plural,
Constr,

Def.

Abs.

A few nouns

double the last letter in the plural ;


but the linea occultam is placed under the first of

77

the two letters

jsnVis, plu. of y*

20.

thus, ya*

people,

is

sea,

plu. ^.VNi., fcoicu

another instance.

States of Feminine Nouns.

In the singular number, the constructive state


changes f of the absolute into 2 1.; thus, \L*yewr9 Z\l*.

Nouns Which in the


o or

absolute state terminate in

in the constructive end in

o or &*; as,
*

victory,
* constr. Zoai

v*s> wntry, constr. HUai.


W *
a*

&]

STATES OF FEMININE NOTTNS.

50

Tern, nouns having a masc. termination


in L JL j as, &&
and those

ending

belly,

the abs. and constr. states the sumo.

make
The

)i; as, PIO

state the

w^

Tud becomes

f of the

info

al>s.

olian#

<l

def. fa^io.

word in the

If the

top.

belly, def,

Inthedef.

liavo a

the same as that of mnsc. nouns

is
P

jop

noons which

state of fern,

definite

masc. termination
as,

ns,

state tovniinafo in

abs.

qnioscetit

in

tlio

def.

ilu^

U,

and

stole,

Jin

torminaiiou in
if lh
preceding 'consonant takes";
in lit"
the abs. be ]o, then Van becomos <iuiosconl in
'

def.

Ex.

4, 5.

Nouns ending in
addition of
def.

Ex.

U;

6,

To avoid

*!,

o .1 or

**

those ending in

malco tho

tho

concourse

without a Towel,

z_ add only

winch

or,

of sorcm!

def.

by

1&*;

ili<*

is

the

sanw

vovrol,

(Iiiny,

nitnu'Iy
;

rr

(o
',

us, |li>|

lalisj.

Nouns ending in ^L
state fern,

in

},

consonanls

placed with tho second or third radical

widow,

the

d( k f. l)y

8, 9.

facilitate the pronunciation,


is

assume

as,

the alw. ninNc .,

in

under tho Nun, which

JH

^o-^o

ijj

dof.

fern,

]Lii**'^D

siato

in

i-hr*

Hi-P.

See p. 40.

In tho plural number tho

confiir,

dor! veil

STATES OF FBMINIHE
NOUNS.

from the
the def.

abs.

1S

53

by changing the final


l into z. and
from the abs.
by changing v into

derived

The Examples in the


folloTraig Table *m fl^er
illustrate what has
been here said on the states
of
Jtena.

nouns.

Singular.

*
*

* *

JiuiP

Oonstr.

STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS,

52

ff

In No.

-7

-V

we have an example of

1,

those nouns imlhi# in

whiclmnclergo no change of vowels in thoir

iliflbwif hfatos; Mi'-h

are,
2.

Nouns which assume an

additional vow<*I

\\\

tlw? <luf* st

singular.
3.

This example represents nouns in which tho

removed

the 1st rad. of the -abs, sing,

is

the def.

oharac,tor of segoluto

They partake of tho

v<*wi'l

on

nul

itt

iuw

in

to tho i2iul

Hehrew.

wo have nouns whose

In these examples

4. 5.

are jl and ]o

A few nouns belonging

the vowel of the

1st,

rad

in tho

def,

ffrmiwitiotiM

to the latter
Htato

niu#.

<*a*t

nn,

def*

6.

This

is

their vowels
as,

o$V
7.

in

which

unchanged, and in which no new vowel

l*b&rly,

O^OA

plu.

vk.^

CLCM prophecy,

is

hitnirlutun I

equality,

Nouns represented by

vowel in the
as,

an example of nouns ending

o^a are mich

or*, which

o^a military

is

placed on

rniv<
tiro

CASES OF NOUNS.
This

8.

the model of nouns the abs. state of which ends in

In the plural

X
9.

is

53

Yud quiescent is changed into Tud

In the nouns represented


by Aoio

we have in the

moveable.

plural

iL

taken away and o moveable


placed before die plural termination

such are, flj^

sacrifice,

In some instances the penultimate


plural

as,

|L

bride, plu.

f 2u* sister, plu, def,

by terminations

]~->+^ praise,

as,

fzL]

The Syrians have no

21.

letter is written twice in the

There are some anomalies;


in the def.

oases

which are marked

tut the nominative and

cases of the Greeks

u*tt ablution.

oblique

and Latins are known by the

context, or are expressed

by the constructive

state,

by the influence of a transitive verb, or by some particle

as,

^ ^1 lok ^

words of God;

&o. preceding

or,

Pio

]a

thus,

words of

God.
to Jesus,

,-4* ^<? have seen

God

loved the world.

tion of the
o]

Hebrew n%
!

woman.

|^.m\

to the

Ms fflory,

Sometimes we see &* in imita;

e. g.

Gen.

i,

See also Acts

1.

i,

1.

ADJECTIVES.
with the king, &c.
If one of the letters

the

first

radical of

which

\ be prefixed to a noun,

o
is

which the
0V070

receives the vowel


Pf

as,

M $ brother, lp, M?
"

When

with

jfccs

rule

is

hundred,

Ifcco

or

it

is

then the prefix

**

had
previously
*
_
l^-^s,
a
'as r*-^*?

*00,

'ix

letters,

which end in two Olaphs,

-*

lt*^*

one of these letters

consisting of three

or

ac

prefixed to a word

and especially to those


takes the vowel ; as,

and a hundred.

But

this

not always observed in words, which are not

composed- of three letters and do not terminate in two


Olaphs.

Again, should two or more of the letters ^> o >


be placed before
any word, # the first of these prefixes be without a vowel the second will have one
;

also,

the third will be without, and the fourth with a

vowel, as

word;

we

for

see, for instance, in

we

the

noun

)&& a

f^is^

say llu^co, iLVtaai

and

Adjectives.

22.
is

The Syriac

adjectives are few,

supplied by other words, which

but this delect

when placed

in cer-

tain positions obtain the use and


signification of adjectives.
Tor instance, the state of construction will

supply the force of an adjective;

of

holiness,

i.e.

holy city, Matth.

as,

}!>*>

iv. 5.

hL^o

city

Also *a sub-

ADJECTIVES.
stantive put absolutely with
O

>

55

prefixed; as,

a natural body, ***oh


f^> a spiritual body, 1 Cor.
xv. 44 Also in other ways
as, the fire, ]&*> $>
;

which
'

is

,0 ariAsij

*****

TO

not extinguished,
.

lit.

inextinguishable;

u*o* ^)>

<p<yiik

himself alive,

i.e.

7^

^0?

/0

(as living).

number

Adjectives arc distinguished by gender,

and

which are the same


^

states,

^ojcn

he shewed

as in substantives.

It is only necessary to notice that in adjectives the

masc.

and the

def.,

fern. abs.

have the same form;

but they are easily known the one from the* other by
the substantive or the verb with which they are connected.

The degrees

of comparison are not to be found

marked

in a change of the adjective, but are merely

by certain particles
The comparative
strued with
*

001

o$

^o

^,s> <-So

either preceding or following

he

is

greater than all

well, very, or t*iu

0PV

90x?

*,

^>L>

he who

^o

Ifcaaco

a two-edged sword,
is

lit.

^4

very
1

ffi&es

<^3su>
*.

who

expressed by the positive con-

is

it

as,

times added
ciiscaa

and connections.

receives.

M**f*o

much
2

(x*]

there

mwh,

is

some-

very ; as,

and sharper than

sharper, &c. Blessed


v

more than he
^o ^2u
X

The comparative

m,

is

by the sc&so of the passage only ;

sometimes marked

77

0V

as,

1^

]O<TU
*

]***&

P *
j
]>oiV"^ the elder shall be servant to the yowiyer.

The

superlative

is

often formed

by the duplication

56

NUMERALS.

of the positive;

by adding the

as,

^-^

particle *=4

to the *part. "N? of the


'

<%ssAo least; sometimes

#0^

which

Hebrews;

as,

is

equivalent
]*2a worst,

plu.; sometimes again by i-K^o mtch;

most honoured; or by

]V$3 mall among twffs,

or as,

UM^AJ
*

least

of those

feostf

<pai>Q^i

as,

who (we)

o/

the least

i.e.

U^^u^o *-^o

^ prefixed to the plural;

b\sm

7 7

as,

ofkmys;

Apostles, literally,

the Apostles ;

or

it is

ex-

pressed in the following manner; whosoever therefore

^tri l^oa ^o of these least


commandments, Matth. v. 19. See also two other
shall

break one

frol]

places in this verse.

formed by the addition of U


to the words from which they are derived; thus,

Many

adjectives are

UiflAa^ corporeal, jlio^ momtcmow, \4^z> primitive.


So also adjectives having a Greek origin ; as,

l*pp

tarb&row,

termination

\i

the adjective;

is

jlJj]

aerial.

In some instances the

added to the primitive word to form

as,

IIA-J

primary, Ijj^m hairy,

proper, ]&>] terrestial; or,tal; as,


V
00
5)

earthly, \+^+> proper.

23.

Numerals are

Numerals.

either cardinal
(l^Uis), or ordinal

NUMERALS.

57

Ordinal.

BP

Cardinal.

Mw.

Fern.

.PP

Jem.

Has.

ft**

fi*

Constr.
T

."

jZ

|u3Z

77

Ofttf

Oonatr.

second

tUrd

IL*-] or ]ix* sw;

PP

ninth

Prom

ten to twenty the numbers one, two, &c. axe

prefixed to ten, in the following

manner

Cardinal.
Fern.

Uaso.
t

eleven

twelve

NUMERALS.

58

Masc

Fom.

t^^'l f

ifl&LaJi

'*

urtee

'

/./

fifteen

seventeen
7

f>

7 9

*fpVi*sa/

ifflSftil^P/

tiightWl

77

wwaoto,

Ordinal
Maw.

Fern.

007

dewntk

thirteenth,

&c.

&c.

The law

them from the cardinal

for deriving

is

sufficiently

obvious.

Cardinal numbers from three are for the most part joined to the
thing numbered by Apposition either in the absolute state

707

'

..>

as,

psjj four months, or the del.; as, ]2C^z |Aiccu three


^Mtf*
X
But
the constructive state is occasionally used ; thus in Matt.
days.
iVi

25,

we have

<(

|ft

->|S" /tfliV

^n cities3 literally

a dscctidaof Gities*

These numbers are frequently found


ordinals.
(is)

eight,

Syntax.)

In Luke
i.

e.

i.

59,

to

we have LolcZj

eighth day,

occupy the place of


c/a^

?^/Wi

**'a;^A /iowr.

(Sco

Jico*

^^

///<?

NUMEBALS.
Denary numbers from 20

90 are expressed in the

to

and are of the common gender


V

thirty,
*

^3',]
*

\+ for

^^Lcu*
*

fifty,

]u

00

2uio^

fem.

number

llo^o hundreds.

^g^j
Z

for

by adding the termination


the

feminine

}\& a hundred,

are,

hundred, ||^oLS^ three hundred,


fixing the less

sixty,

masc,

as,

twentieth.

The remaining numerals

plu.

^Zu,
*

^aA seventy,

^2. ninety.

masculine, and

i>

plural,

^ti^L
*

twenty ,
9

ordinals are derived from these

the

^mk
* *

thus,

forty,

<--oiZ or ^jj^cZ eighty,

The

59

<fec.,

^^o

which are formed by pre-

of the feminine gender before ^]&.

Also,

w^

^^

or

two

a,

foj^

tftousand, def.

or |lsu^; os5 ten thousand, plu.


1

PIu.

^oa'/.

Twice, thrice, Ac. are expressed by cardinals, with the noun

jj

time, after

#rice;

Words
>

them;

yO

as,

-^l 2^^,

^aj

once,

lit,

one time;

thrice;

of the wliole are, JlO^oZ a


denoting a part

a fourth part,

^^v

ien^/*,

J/wrcZ jjcri,

&c.

&c. are expressed


Multiples, as double, treble,

by

and a

cardinal number following with *s prefixed, or sometimes without


it; as,

]^">t">

t^*

seven

f^> Kt

one in or into seven,

double.
i

The days
Sunday;

of the

week

|a,A3

^ fast

day of the week,

f-^ ^*5^ second day, Monday PAD l^Z Tuesday;

]"*-* jLai] Wednesday;


is

are,

)oo*pt, and Saturday,

ISAD U^u*

Thursday.

But Friday

PKONOTOS.

24.

are sometimes separable,

PRONOUNS

consist of words, and sometimes mepwdble,

are expressed
at the

is

by

they

particles,

The

a table of the personal pronouns.

.Plural.
Fem.

they

i. e.

certain particles called affixes placed

end of nouns, verbs, or other

following

e.

i.

Singular.
Pern.

Com. Masc*

Com.

Masc.

We

1st person.

You

001
?

001

ooi

and

pronouns;

are also used for the demonstrative

i-oi

as, 001

]y3^hatman9

They are not often employed

^01 |l&j|

thatwomm.

as substantive verbs

although they are occasionally so used in conjunction


with particles. (See 1 Cor. iv.
and

They are met with


to a sentence.

instance from

7,
elsewhere.)
to give
or
confirmation
emphasis

Eoffinan in his

Ephraim

Grammar

Syrus, T. I. p.

122

D,

cites

an

and he

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
adds
in

uU plwra

by

i/p8) ipsa,

and

MSS.

In

^1

and

ip]

latest,

ii.

or

and

ille, ilia.

we

find

only ^L*

as, <al

,-L*,

and occasionally

most part found

oS^o

<QJOI

after a

have filled

tliey

The Demonstrative Pronouns.

tot f

?<"(
]><j\

and ~oi by

oji

9.

25.

. p

001

are for the

^1

John

the Maronites translate

states

are used indifferently in the oldest

transitive verb;

them,

and

later ones

In the

<-i~(.

Amira

hujus generis invenies.

Ms Grammar that

*-*oi

61

tkis>

fem

\
^

fl

Ijci )

>
^

^, masc.
this,

MOT)

oa<n

these,, raasc,

{*^

these, fern.

^Jdi

These become reflexive by being joined to the


personal pronouns ; as,

01 001

he himself,

l*oi

**& she

herself.

In the Theophania of Eusebius, we have yMci and


*jj
y^oi for ^uai and ^^01.
IJOT

and

IJCT

coalesce with 001 and

have the following compounds,


u*gi

ttw

jj^i

7J
QJOI

*-oi
"

<Aw

and then we
>,

masc.

l^oi

fern.

with the

01

as a
expunged seems to be used

RELATIVE AOT INTEHEOGATIVE PRONOUNS.

62

noun

suffix to the

See

to-day.

Mark

of which

<oi

form

is

>ocu

thus,

may

Orient. T. III. p. 75, line 4,

<<n

is

substantive and the adjective.

met with

as in

Ephraim

<oi, fait

this

In Assem. Biblioth.

T. I. p. 370.

Ephraim

day, or

be regarded as the definite

occasionally found; as, |ato* *+>

suspicion.

also

this

and elsewhere.

xiv. 30,

tf<n

U^&*

found between the

Again, the

fern, joi is

T. III. p. 590,

joo

in

The demonstrative pronouns in the plural number,


a
o
viz. ^ojcri jind ^01 etymologists derive from M^ tM&.
x

>

These pronouns are also found performing the


of personal pronouns.

The
is

(See p. 60.)

The Relative and

26.

relative is

>

Interrogative Pronouns..

of both genders and numbers, and

prefixed to words.

It

the same as the JSthiopic

is

H, which in Hebrew has the same use and


as

or

IKftj

office

signification

^f.

In the Jerusalem lectionary

found as a

is

-?

relative according to the Ohaldee.

The

interrogatives are,

of the person
^io
of the thing ji,

^&
7

^o

is

^,

]ii, <o>,

77"
cu

of both genders and numbers.

.*
001

and

his eyes ? lit

have

who f

who

also Q*^n

-ul2

^aiail^

as,

is he,

what

^vp
V

01^0

who kath opened

who hath opened for him

is it ? for

coi

what f
compounded of

is

his eyes ?

Wo

AFFIXES.

68

and thing arc


who, which, what? of the sing. numb,

Intorrogativos of both person

masc.

fern,

lj*l

and ^J\, who, which, what ? of the plural

The

particle ** is not unfrequently found with

See Matth*

interrogative pronoun.

66

John

vii.

xviii. 1.

an

Luke

i.

Schaaf says, "particular hujus

35, &c.

usus frequens est ininterrogationibus, et valet id quod

apud Graecos apa"

UJ,

)t*),

<-JL] have

Latin gualis, lohat sort


body f L

e.

sometimes the force of the

lf^ }L]a

fyc. ; as,

with what sort of body ?

zcith

what

1 Oor. x^. 35.

poa compounded of o and fa expresses how great ?


or

how many

See Matth.

quot ?

When
become

John

? equivalent to the Latin qi^ntus ? or

is

vi.

xv, 34, &c.

used with these interrogatives, they

relatives

as,

^1^

P>

who

enteretli not,

with

tlie

Tie

x. 1.

Care must be taken not


^io.

23

to

confound

Before the use of vowels,

flie

^o

with a point above the ao, and the latter

The Greek
of course

particle

^5, /t&

shows whether

this

preposition

former word was written

is also

^p,

written

or the pronoun

^o,

with a point below it.


^ib.

is

The

context

intended.

The following Table exhibits what are called


pronominal affixes^ which are added to the end of
27.

nouns.

They

are certain abbreviated terminations or

inseparable particles, and have the signification of


possessive nouns.

AFFIXES.

Singular.
*

com

*-*

my

gender,

masc.

thy

fern.

thy

masc.

his

fern.

Iwr

com.

our

y-

com

gender,

tnasc.

masc.
fem.

28.

They
*+9
*

There

their

are

are expressed

possessive

separate

by the letters

which, the older form of

j,

pronouns.

^j

compounded of
and ^> to.
Chald.

These are put before the affixes ; thus,


thy,

masc

ow^
their,

>nSi?
*
K

z^/w,

fern.

oil^^
<*>

<oa!^j* your, masc.

masc. ; ^oi-^j

^^S.;
*
i

yoe^,,

fern.

their, fern.

by M,
and the preposition ^o ; sometimes the substantive
Distributive pronouns are expressed

* In the Jerusalem
Leotiouary we find y*o used for the
3rd pers. sing. masc. to a phi. noun.

affix

of the

is

taken away and the distributive pronoun is inwas originally a noun


^o only (perhaps

dicated by

denoting &parf)
^ocmSio

thus, ^oauio

some of them ; also by

^\ some

41I^T>

pol^a or ^o f SnSn whatsoever.

of them, or

or VV>^*> tokosoever,

The

latter

pronoun

is

all, and ya^ something, or wy A{ftyr.


composed of
Other pronouns are formed by adding the affixes

9V

to the

0*

nouns \+su soul or person, and

or person; as,

^aa

l^a

j^coio substance

MZ?^ thyself; OIASJ <^IM ^jlo


"

wd Ae went, Mnged himself ;


See also John vi. 53.

29.

We come now

to

Nouns

oiiooios A

with Affixes.

nouns with

The vowel

affixes.

changes of nouns receiving the affixes in

many and

himself.

Hebrew

are

complicated; but in Syriac are few and

simple. The following is an example of a masculine


noun, which is first put in the definite state and

then takes the


tion

affixes in the place of

the termina-

Singular.

l^i

Def, State.

1st.

2nd.

pers. sing.

com.
masc.

**:&

ti*ff

w#

*M,<r

NOUNS WITH APPIXES.

66

fern.

3rd

masc.

3rd

fern.

oia!^>

7.7

1st.

v n^to

plu. com.

pers.

2nd.

*.

our

2nd

her

masc.

t^"^ >-^

your

fom.

^ T ^V.vn

your

3rd

masc.

3rd

fern.

PluraL
7

1st. pers.

sing.

com.

"iSsSf?

masc.

2nd.

thy

...

^^.^x.y^

thy

.^^r>

our

^-^vn
'

2nd.

3rd.

fein.

fern.

1st. pers. plu.

com.

2nd.

masc.

fern.

**..**

masc,

3rd

,....

fern.

v.

your

..

'^'^^S"
*

3rd.

'

^.^^^y>
7

2nd.

masc.

3rd

..

my Mng*

your

^pm*J&o

their...

NOUNS WITH AFFIXES.

1.

The word

Nouns

state of
first

pronounced 3falk

is

persons plural in <o^_,

*~^4 my

boy,

number the

the singular

in

which terminates in

*.*

]1 9

^a

boy,

form the

definite

of the

affix

and the second and third

person singular in ***,

\^4

the

otiose.

being
2.

i.aVfl

^oou_,

<^fft*_; thus,

<Q=U^ your

<piA/

boy,

their boy.

Such nouns

3.

as terminate

Tud

immediately before
take the affixes the
in the plural,

Pethocho
affixes

as,

\*lz>

is

Yud

first

an

changes

its

architect, plu.

vowel to

V^. With

we have ^is, ^*ia.

the definite like


of the

letter

having a vowel, frhen they


removed, another ^ is added

Those nouns having the

4.

plu.

and the

and the

in-

first

jjou>

person sing,

as, ^J<na

my

retain the

with the

and

affixes

and second and third persons


Again, those in the abs.

priest.

state having the vowel

abs. state like


^pia,

on the

last syllable,

and

'
is
any other vowel on the preceding syllable, the
preserved with the affixes of the above-mentioned
'

persons;

as,

yow altar,
5.

'

***=>& altar,

'

<n|Sp

1.

my

altar,

^-r*c

&c,

There are some nouns, namely, monosyllables,


*
in the abs. state, and which

which have the vowel

lose it in the definite.

Such nouns preserve the

NOUNS WITH AFFIXES.

68

with the

affixes of the

above-mentioned persons ;

blood, **&>

yo> def. fay

The nouns

my

Hood.

and

like fl^^o^o speech,

which haye the

as,

jl^LSsD shade,

under the

linea occultans

first

Lomad,

when they take the affixes, the linea occultans


7
as,
removed, and the Lomad receives

is

Lord,

The reason
noun

)fi

is

is
is,

not found with any pronominal affix.


that under such circumstance, the

used in

its

place

**D my Lord,

thus,

ypD thy 'Lord, <n& his Lord, &c.


Three nouns, namely, |a| father, |lf

brother,

JLOu father-in-

law, take the affixes in an irregular manner.

1st pers.

sing.

2nd

com.

-^l

my

masc.

yOZij

thy

father

...

2nd

fern.

t*oo3J
"

31x1

masc.

3rd

fern.

thy

^102]

his

cios]

her

*?
1st. pers. plu.

com.

^oa|
*

2nd

masc.

our

*7

^aaaa]

your

* v

The

2nd

fern,

3**

maso.

3rd

fern.

^aas| yew
^poioa]

their

^OIQS}

their ....

other two nouns take the affixes in

the

same

way,

NOUNS WITH AFFIXES.


except that jio* makes

^SQ~

(jj)

See

zy father-in-law*

obs.

4, p. 46.
7

,*

p, |p,

sow, has

**p my

&on>

^osp yor MR, <pcnp

their

son, &c.

In feminine nouns the same

30.

affixes are

used

both numbers ; namely, those which are annexed


to the singular number of masculine nouns. They are

for

put to the end of feminine nouns in the constructive


state in the first person singular, and in the second

and third persons

plural,

and

at the

end of their

definite state in the other parts, the termination

The reason of this

haying been taken away.


ence is, that as to the pronominal
if

affixes

differ-

mentioned,

they were placed to the definite state of the noun,

there would be a concourse of several consonants

without a vowel.

The following
with

is

an example of feminine nouns

affixes.

Singular.

77

abs.

Pft

family, const.

&Sf*

def.

1st. pers. sing.

com.

2nd ............ masc.

|AJ3ft
7

^kDf4,

mV

y2o^k

thy

......

?n$

......

family

2nd.

............

fern.

3rd ............ masc.

1*
t

oifio*^

NOUNS WITH AFFIXES.

70

3rd ............. fem.

her

aitojA

family

1st. pers. plu.

com.

2nd ............. masc.

3rd

......

3id.

your

masc.

fern.

your

7*

^a^i*

fern.

......

^oata}*
7

2nd.

our

^2i3^
*

tlmr

oiZOf*

......

Plural
fl

1st

perM. slug,

com

mkSfA.

way

families

thy

......

2nd

............

masc.
fl

2nd.

fern,

t^o^OyA.
ir\

his

3rd.

1st.

jiiid.

2nd.

3rd.

pers. plu.

fern.

with the

wftsc.

fern.

affix

transfers the

remains in the others;"

ywr

com.

to the
foUowing letter; thus,
it

maso.

....

31 ........

Up

ft

fem.

daughter.

as, x

from the

^p my daughter;
p thy daughter,

first

but

<o^p

NUMERALS AND PARTICLES WITH AFFIXES.

31

Numerals and Particles with

Numerals receive the


the

in

number;

plural

masc,, ^autfi

affixes of

thus,

these four,

7J

these six,

these

two,

these five,

^oauLiiflM

<pau2^a* these seven,

pou&^4i totf ame,


singular affixes

9 9

-3

<p<rujjicz

these ten.
tpouijffl^
*

When the

masculine nouns

these two, fern.,


{pauZL^i these three,

<paute*s;|

affixes.

<p0u?

*7fl7
masc,,

71

annexed, they have

ajre

the power of possessive pronouns, and contain therefore another signification,


7

ten,

^{mi>

example, fftZyx& his

New

Testament

number

to
X

in me, ?

from, ouia from


^ooiilcco

find

*2y&l

of particles take the affixes


*

CD in

we

his

the twelve disciples of Christ,

twelve, speaking of

great

]?or
*

fe, ^ooiZ^ their ten; and

very frequently in the

in thee;

him,

to,

e*/^ them, &c.

from

Some

as,

^^

to

m;

itos

you; ^o
*
after,

the
particles take
7 *

affixes of

others.

masc, nouns plu.

me,

^^

**&

for,

&<jfor<?

mlead

#/^;
of,

as,

y>f

before,

so likewise

besides,

-^t

^ oor

near,

and

VERBS.

32.

rerb

is

of the

IN

Hebrew, the root of the

the 3rd. pers, sing. numb, masculine gender


first

triliteral,

conjugation.

few

roots have

are

Most

of the

quadrilateral.

The

roots

are

triliteral

a vowel under the second letter, and

make only one


The

as in

Syriac,

different

syllable.

forms of the verb, which express

various modifications of the original sense, are usually

They amount to eight, of which


four have an active, and four a passive, and somecalled conjugations.

times a reciprocal signification.

^a,

names from the verb

They

derive their

and are contained in the

following table, from which the characteristic of each

conjugation

may be

observed.

Act.

Pass.

Peal

^>la

Pael

4.

Ityaal

Aphel

\s>]
m

EfktapM

Shapfal

\zL

8*

Mtaphal

Ithpeel

The Peal conjugation is the same as the Kal


Hebrews ; that is, it expresses the verb in its

of the

simplest

form and meaning.

VERBS.

73

All the passive conjugations are formed by prefixing 4 to the corresponding active conjugation. The
of the Aphel

is

ut of Shaphel

is

The Ethpeel
as,

gation;

changed into L in its passive, and the


transposed with z in the EshtapheL
is,

^4-04

1st,

the passive of the Peal conju-

was

lie

2nd, It is reflexive;

slain,

>04>zteo exalteth itself. (2 Cor. x. 5.)

as,

In in-

3rd,

transitive verbs, the Ethpeel has sometimes the

Us and -aa4,

signification as Peal, e.g.

seen in SchaaPs Lexicon under IAS,

cording to

Hoffman (Gram.

and obsolete

^^1

lie

Pael

is

may be

as

4th, It

is,

ac-

p. 178), in intransitive

verbs, sometimes the pass, of

was commended from


the Piel of the

^m

Aphel ; as,
he conmended.*

Hebrew ; when the

cation of the Peal conjugation

is intransitive,

makes it

wasjwt

J3*1

same

transitive

ow]

as,

it

signifi-

the Pael

m fitting, Pael

fa justified : sometimes it expresses the Peal sense

tf.

with greater energy

as,

^l* he

asked, Pa. he asked

This conjugation

often or diligently.

has'

sense in

some verbs

to tw/, i.e.

he sold.

a causative
7

as, <pi he bought, ^p\ he corned


*

To the Pael

is

sometimes assigned

the sense of comnwidwg, permitting and declaring


expressed by the Peal.
Ethpaal is the passive of the preceding conjuga-

what

tion.

is

As

the Pael, in

many

instances,

I think this last use of the Ethpeel rests

signifies to

on no certain foundation.

VE3LBS.

74

make or ccwse

do whatever

to

is

by the
made

indicated
to be

Peal,

the Ethpaal will necessarily signify


that which is denoted by the Peal; and hence

to

do

it is

that the Peal and Ethpaal conjugations in some verbs

the same meaning ;

possess nearly

uHmZ| he was made


lie

Tie

to think,

as, WOAA*

i.e.

drew near, Ethpaal, he was made


drew near.

he thought ,

o^

he thought,

draw near,

to

i.e.

Aphel corresponds to the Hiphil of the Hebrew.

In sense

it

is

usually causative of Peal

as,

& he

remembered, Aph. &>] he caused to be remembered,


he commemorated. It is also found to possess the signification of desiring, permitting, declarmg, exhibiting,

&c.

whatever

by the Peal; as, *4^*I


he permitted or grmted power. In occasional instances, the Pael and Aphel are found to have the
same

signification

teristic of

The charac-

prefixed to the root.

all

by

Grammarians.

and

Those which follow

"

much

rarer occurrence.

The Ethtaphal
It

the particle

z|

is

the

passive of the preceding conformed from the Aphel by


prefixing
and changing the Olaph, the characis

teristic of the Aphel

conjugation, into Thau.

of this form are seldom found.


(Philox. vers.) the

have also

^1>1

conjugations are of very frequent use,

are acknowledged

jugation.

^? and

as,

is

Aphel

The preceding
are of

indicated

is

wuZ)

sm

from

See

yl*i&j shall be
Izj.

Examples

Mark

xiii.

darkened

24

We

VERBS,

The

73

Sliapliel conjugation is generally considered to

have the same

by prefixing
Aphel takes

signification as the

and

to the root,

like the Pael

to quadriliteral verbs

much more

but

Examples

are,

t=&+

that Michaelis

made

lie

he

or caused to

made

perfect,

77

t*^&*

consummated,

lie

been referred

a separate conjugation of tri-

it

-DJU^A he inflamed, *^z


*

serve,

"

found so frequently

it is

so than the Ethtaphal

and others have made


literals.

and

under the second radical instead of

persons this conjugation has

By many

it is formed

Aphel;

*-*a*-

promised,* ^3$+ he

lie

announced.

Eshtaphal is the passive of the preceding conjugaand is formed from it by prefixing L\ transposing

tion,

the L with the .*, and changing


radical into

The

under the second

7
.

conEsJitGphal conjugation agrees in form with the tenth

jugation of Arabic verbs.

If the

first

radical of a verb be

transposed with L of the particle

Ethpaal conjugations
of uaatAZ]

After

\,

wu^tap] he

the L

as, **29\]

is

as,

was

^]

wo^M

*&,

i,

-*, it is

in the Ethpeel and

he was

left,

instead

lifted up, instead of uoLco^l,

into

changed
he was conquered,

and

^^^1

after

into

he icas crucified*

Verbs are either regular or irregular. The former


class includes all those verbs which preserve their
radicals

unchanged throughout

all their inflexions,

VEK03S.

76

the latter those which lose or undergo a change of

one or more

radicals,

There are two tenses, the prseterite and future.


Their forms are

^4b

and ^G^OJ, and these forms


<n

determine the past and future times more accurately


than they do in Hebrew. The present tense may be

with the aid of the


expressed by the active participle
of the auxiliary
personal pronouns, By means also
are
defined
yerb two other tenses
;
namely, the imperfect

and pluperfect, of which some account

will be

afterwards given.
Gram.

Sciadrensis in his

pc^o }jp

follows; Aicja
v

ff

fife \is]o

p.

>ota>

\*

ica writes on the tenses


<QJ|

<J*iStfj

y7

OoZ

|Du^Z

as
.

U=1 t=^? U^l-

Tenses also are three,

which we number in the first mood; namely, the praterite, the


present and the future.

By

the present tense he means the active

participle with a personal pronoun, and there


this combination is so often

a verb in the present

is

no doubt that

used for the purpose of representing

tense, not

only in the versions of the

Scriptures, but also in Syriac writings of a later date, that a

grammarian may with propriety,


this construction the

name of a present

this respect the Syriac

language

has done, give to

as Sciadrensis

is

tense, yo\>> ]ls].

much more

perfect than

of the others which belong to the Shemitic class.


V

tense

form^ajb

any

In Arabic the

which the grammarians designate c.U*


resembling,

viz,

*-'

.*/<>

the

In

is

very uncertain as to the time

it

is

intended to

mark. Sometimes, when accompanied by certain


particles, such as
* ^*
6'
it

expresses the future

at other

times

when

it is

VERBS.

77

preceded by

ft

h fts

the force of the present

but in numerous

instances the context alone can determine the tense -which this

form of the verb


there

is

so

JSthiopic

much

is

designed to indicate. So likewise in JEthiopic

indefiniteness

Grammar,

calls

on

this

point that Ludolph, in his

JETM1C tmpus

contingent,

which le

ta-anslates/ac^or/aci^p, 43; and in p. 37 he instructs us in


"
this tense as follows :
Contingens tarn Prsesens, quam Futurum
Indicativi reprsesentat."

Concerning the expression of the present tense, Hoflman says,


in his

Gram.

The

p.

3S5,plerumque

different

in

Jmcjtnem

part, uswrpatur?

numbers, persons and genders are

formed by prefixes and affixes joined to the root of


the verb, as in the Hebrew.

The imperative form


sense.

A negation or

is

used in

prohibition

is

an affirmative
expressed by the

future tense and the particle P not, placed before

The

infinitive is in its nature

it.

an abstract noun, and

as such receives the pronominal affixes.


active, neuter, or passive sense

It has

an

and when added to

the verb will give intensity to the signification.


33. Before

we proceed

to give the tables of the

different classes of verbs, it is desirable to present the

student with the tenses, &c. of the substantive verb


]ooi

he was, and of

M &, which are


z

forms, and because the former

general conjugations.

is

peculiar in their

much used

in the

VERBS.

Preterite Tense.
Poison.

Future.
Peiion.

Singalar.

/ sAa^

or iviU

|ooi|

IOOTZ

t^ow sAo/f or

wz#

<-*ocnZ

t^ow j/wt^ or

w/^

AH

com.

"be

6e

6<5

masc.
feni.

(T'

IOOTJ

]ooiZ

he shall or

m^ be

Ae *Aa2Z or will le

masc.
fern*

VEKBS.

70

Plmal
1

|oou
n
*

wf

*-ndcir

shall or will If

corn.

ye dmll or will If

o
ye

slut??

or mil he

they shall or

ZPS/^ 6e

or will le

inasc.

fern.

masc.

fern.

to be

Imperative.
Singular

u^OOl

If thou

maso
fern,

Huial

masc.

0001
6e ye

fern.

Present Tense.
Person.

Gender

Singular,

lam

com*
maac.

031
art
*

fern.

XV

cuooi or 001 oai

he

is

masL-.

fern.

VERBS.

80

Qendci.

Pluial.

Person

{0401

^001

we are

com.

ye are

maso,

ye are

fern,

they are

masc.

they are

fern.

pep
Participle,
Singulai.

loai

masc.

being or is

or ^5

fern.

or are

masc.

or ore

fern.

Pluial.

t-'

6a7i^r

^S(poi

The personal pronouns are frequently used in the


place of the substantive verb after a participle,

by
which means the present tense of verbs may be exWe have also
pressed, as will be afterwards seen.
the personal pronoun in such an instance
lie is

good.

In these

in preference to
34,

<aj<n

We come next

cases,

^ju]

and

is,

which

^1

as, 001

<A^

are employed

and
to

is

the same as

the

Hebrew #\

manner,

It takes the affixes in the following

VERBS.

81

}" IM!,

JHM

If to 2u1 \vilh

HH

iiflLves

bo joined iho vorb ]c, the

nwMvill bo forniod; ihns^luccj


,

Joari

^m^L*]

Thn vtH) ZJ

fit'

M;,

^*Z

twx.

si^nilirs

//;

////^^vhcn

it is

followed

by Ismail uilh

(lti

fe
.

prohonnnnl

allix( s;

ns,

J'1'n

ft

Tho

ticguiivo ibrni is

*l; wluttt

it

&,

'tit.

a contraction of P

niul

joined with the pronominal affixes

VKIIBS.

wo

obtain

we, Lc.

on

ilic

/"<'

'<.

for tlio oiliovs.

have,

we

'

following,

A^

Or

l>y

-iui I

aurl S

'*"* *"*' H0t '

mnmxmtf
*o

ili'^

^^A

nflixcs io tl-

w/

/*

.//,

ff/

not, &c.

85.

Wo will now giro

as
conjUKatioiiH, &o.,
roitdai' vorlis in

tin

Amoral.

V=

a paiwligm of
oxainplo of the

iuil.jxi.iu

ils

of

CONJUGATION OF JIEGTJLAH VEKBS,


TllL'l.

Prrot.3.

maw.

3. fern.

2.

UWHC.

2. ffiu.

['In.

1.

com.

3,

11 11

we.

3. fism.

2. iiutHu.

iZ,

fouu

1.

com.

Infitiitlu

hiifur.

JnuHC.

fctti,

P!ur.

iniiHC.

fdlll.

i-~

AM

Kut, 3. mtwo,
3. fern,

2.

muse.

fnii.

1.

com,

1'lur, 3. iMimc,

tin

fdfl,

ii.

TUIWU,

2. IViu.

Curl, act

[t.'l;,,',,

.,>..

EXAMPLE ^^10 he

85

slew.
Shnplid.

Ethtaphal.

Aphol.

* r
-

ZZl

fc

'

t>

<T.

Ealiiapluxl.

AQA

SO

IIKGUJUAJI VEU15S.

Obsmatnm

IJ6.

on Hcynltir

The Pwterifa

The

Idler of

first

he root

most part

votvol, the second has for the

times

it

of

mind

llio

WBS>
Atf

/ftf

<//?w,

/////

and

'

as,

of ih<\s*

ct^

ilius,

Those also whose


th(

Also

htfntfj!lMl.

rI)s

as,
I

^.jl

how

or sensations

7/6*

a ditloronco

radieal

first
;

as, ja2U

in
///*

hut

in

7^cf

many

of Ki;ni(i(*aiion

^.U /tPMtnlwl, and

^^o

arc whiHi admit both

aectonlin^ lo CaHt(H's

Me< <Hul

whoso

y( rl)s

/w/rr/,

///?

and *&*^ tw fax nt/wi

MiobactliM \M\ linvc

undn'

verbs and

^cro 7^

SN^5

A*/^/;/,

isOlnph;

in,stan(MH

denoted;

'

7/ti

///*

HonHM'(

/itwry.
'

^>>

^A

rfuluttil

mw/,

^<ro 1w

as,

6'7(V/^r/,

affectioiiH, qualities,

Iwt somo-

',

intransitive

has % especially in

vorlw denoting the

gouorally without a

is

Yud

is

Lexicon by

^U lu'MHffhl.

have

fV<*<ju(jntIy

M/.

The Van oflhc

jnase-

and Vud of the

fejn.

at lito

ondofllui third person, plural number are somolimOH


omitted, and thnvorh
in

t ho

often

is

wrilien '-\^j

cm so iu (ho oldest, AIKS*

that these, letters

are,

fay

*//*<?.

Tbi

The reason

is

never pronounced.

Nun panmoffio IH added in some jtiNlaiufn* liotli


totbOTnaso. and fom. Bonders of 11m ihird person,
plural numhtir, hut movo fn<ju(,ntly to tho latter}
*.

as,

*'

^CU^D! *>**&*

^^ r( F' rs
'

*'

'u.

muc, and

fern-

87

VE1U3S.

The

force of this particle is supposed to be that

of giving energy or certamty to the expressions in

which

it is

found to occur.

The

first

person plural has frequently

^1 at the end, as, ^L^O


Tho Ethpcel of the

instead of

,j

&c.

^^o),

3rd. pers. sing. fern, in

examples terminates in

Tud

place was not known.

Bar. Heb. Chron. 86.

as, ci&aoj

M^Z]
5.

some
P his

Seo

also 135. 5; 482. 8.

A very few

verbs are found to have Olaph pros7

thetic

*>

he found, i*2U] he drank.


X

as, v-*a*l
I*

It will be observed

that the numbers

by

by inspecting the Paradigm


and persons of this tense are formed

affixing a particle of one of the personal

to the radical letters

thus, ^okl^Lo for

pronouns

^oftj

The Future.

This Tense sooms to bo formed in the active conjugations by prefixing certain abbreviated forms of

the personal pronouns to the imperative


for

and

^Q^U

W ^a$z
;

mood

thus,

^o^io and

for

In the passive conjugations the same forms are


used instead of

Verbs having
prorforito, in

of the particle
zj
*

under the middle radical of the

the future take

7
;

as,

^^1

a fow also

88

UJBGITLAR VEliBS.
*

liaveo;

as,

o^,

^,

OD^OJ;

A"*
?Q*^*

Those whoso

A low
a guttural or Hish take
verbs submit to no rule as to tho vowels which they

third radical

is

I will receive, which has

receive ; thus, ^z]

We

vowels as the Ilcb, IBN,

Tho second and


sometimes admit

have also ^s\

otiose or paragogic at the

as in lh*biv\v,

iicn,

J,

no third
probably

or <acn instead of*-* an in JUrbrew.

It is certainly

somewhat remarkable

Chdd. Arab, and


tliifi

JKthiop,

that

Nun, when

3rd, pen}, of the fui should be

Syristc in

but only tlmo, namdy, ^j-

person sing, and plu. of both vendors iak<

from

end ;

The prutformalive letters are not four,


namely, yrtf ;

foxnimno

third persons singular

Yud

and J^a^bz

thus, .*iA(fe

tho saiuc

it

SB

tlio

prefix

for tlio

in Hoi). un<l alwj In

Tlie rhwiution of the

Yticl.

particular from the rost of the Hiu'iwlio lanp!;uft^8

1ms been a piw/Jo to many, uml has frivtw

rise to various (oti-

Tho oni however, in which wans (irmuma*


rt
J*HO, is <his, vi/ that tlu Nun
1

jcctural explanations.

riuiw havo Hoenti'd ineliwwl to

was

writt.cn for

follows

by

not at

all

fuit,

Yud by

mistako.

This opinion

cx|inAsmi

lloilinan } but in \\hirl) this distin^ui.Mh^d linguist

concur,

" A'M

tlnci*

i
pnxiiornt. 3 p^rsonat tmiltit* Hiis|n r4niu

quia in cognatis dinluctiH Yntluivon^batur.nt^nu! diibiturunt

litterarnni

Yud

ot

Nun, qum nano mint

auxtlium vocarc punnutationoin


fir

Nun iiwUwl

of

figura

f'acillinnim."

Yd appears

<^i

lan^ua^c was written and spokwi

at

flu*

similliinn% in

Now ihi>, motto of


mo in tin* hitfluwt

hnprolmhlcr, imhiud alnioHt uI)Hur<l, sviicn


tlu;

In

wo conhitW

same litms

that

'Uid tltut

REGULAR VERBS.
Nun

is

Yud

so unlike

sible one

in pronunciation that

we

is

nest to impos-

pers.

^o^laj and not ^o^lo*, than

is

attempt to explain what, for want of data,


exception, however,

is

is

universally

Yud,

Nun

for the

Thero, tho

as in the other Shcmitic dialects.

the whole Lectionary, both in

its

to

obviously inexplicable,

to the use of the prefix

third pers. fut. exists in the Jerusalem Lcctionary.


prefix

Tt is better

should rest satisfied with the fact, that the fut.

form of the 3rd.

An

it

should bo mistaken for the other.

letter

therefore that

89

But

structure and words, has a very

strong Chaldaic complexion, and this circumstance

may

account

for the exceptional usage.

The verb .-m^

m, for * through the

receives

whole of tho

IT.

Ethpeel conjugation, except tho

infin.,

which

is

regular; thus,

prat. dsua^Z], he obeyed or consented, impor. a2L*a^z|, part.

Tho

root dL3, used chiefly in the Apliol,

is,

in that conjugation,

he exhorted*

fafmilwe.

The

Infinitive of all the conjugations lias

prseformativo.

Tho Poal

is

masculine,

Mom

The others

have the termination o, and are feminine*

Imperative.

The observation on the vowel placed over Uie second


radical of the future holds
as, oaic> sleep ye,

o^U

atfk

good in the imperative ;


In tho Ethpeel and
ye.

Ethpaal conjugations tho middle radical has no vowel,

90

UKGULAJl VKK1IM.

and under

it is

placed

llic

Uuea OMwIluus.

This peeu-

probably arisen from the general practice


pcoplo to utter a command in a hasty and an abrupt

luu'ity has
of*

manner.

Nun

is

paragogic

somet imes found wiih the forms

of the imper, in tho


tions; as,

Tho

^o^o

Jlolmnv

with %

with

all

l\

aclivo J*articiplo

noun

])nrti<n])inl

Vnu

ariwH from

On

conjuga-

for

hns ahvayw tho

,l

without the Van, which

^,4

u*

Pad and Aphcl

IVa-l,

insrHcd

is

KaL

in

lite

This cirrnunslanco

not bring used with Iho

vo\v<*l

**,

lut

tho contrary, tho jmwivo pariutiplo has


vowtJi

tlio

';

The. participles of

^^s^o.

as,

tho othor conjugations aro derived from

toriio

Ibrni

hy prollxing

M<m.

Tin's lottcn IH

a particle of tho pronoun ^si;


w/<o 9litydh 9

pra>

Aphel conju^ationH tho Olaph

is

very probably

o lhat
In

ow<f tt/tn/htff.

i.e.

llio

^4^0

iw

//^'

ilm passive and

otniiiedand Us

vowd

tal<ou l>y tho 'Mt in f


k

From

tho

verbs of tho

last

wmaHk must ho exempted some

Aphcl conjugation, which

ivfain

th<?
</

Olaph \vhon another


pe.nniUiuy

to live.

Tho part. ^+o


first

rad.,

Thin

I.

i>s

21.

in

a,

pr<j(ixe<l;

also tho ntse in the

MimilmM

especially
ailvO

lott(r

'

tukos tho vowel

IntruiiH,

verbs;

on tho

91

YB11BS.

Occasionally the form ^S^LO has an active signification; as,

*WiA

^4

taking up,

carrying, *+*] hold-

ing, &G.

The Olaph of the Aphel conjugation


in the Ethtaphal into L\ as,

This
p.

changed

^^oZteo for^.cJf*
See

likewise true in the whole conjugation..

is

74
37.

few;

The

a few anomalies, and

gutturals produce

only

Syrians have not so great a variety of vowel


tiie Hebrews.
Verbs, tiie third radical of which

the

for

changes as
is at,

WM,

^>

or 3, havo in the future and imperative Poal for

the most part the vowel

under tho middle radical.

other conjugations and the active

the place of*;


lie

is

w*-^o

as,

participle

ff

wor$Mjr>pi</ a

w ruSp

mocked, pj] he commemorated, p>Z],


IK

In the
v

Peal, they have


7V

glorying,

iu
V V

I^D

p^J.
ir>

In tho imperative of tho passive conjugations of verbs, which

have a guttural for the third radical, the second radical receives
V 7

a vowol;

as,

<n

JpZ|

for

Jp4-

In tho Jerusalem Loctionary the future and imperative Peal


of verbs whose third radical is a guttural arc formed after the

paradigm of the regular verb

The verbs

D he

^aiOA*, w*o&a*, &c.

as,

consoled,

]^l

he dejihd, \L he polluted,

and a few others in the Pael and Ethpaal


conjugations, havo the
same changes of the vowels as tho guttural verbs arc mentioned in the preceding
paragraph.

38.

(form

them;

The Present Tewe

%M and
thus,

is

formed by tho participles

the personal pronouns placed after

VJBRBS.

i;

M
7

f/wt

^*^

iu]

"M-s

001

I'lui.tl,

7/'/

rSM(.0

The
by

(.ho

ihird JXM

ad.

S.

phi.

ffl*

is

ttltor

ttw

fl

^vnornlly

<

.\

pressed simply

part, in ihr plural nuntbci*.

Tlui ]xu*K(>ual pronoun


a

ff/r

tho participle;

in

a,

ofu*n iound lHlon* UK woll

W ^f W

/ jr/, (!in. xv. 2.

wordH MoiuolimcH inb'rvotin b(twHn Ihc

ami iho pnrtutiph",


,/ ^/fc'

without tikifrlwH.

as

I*)

/)io

first

1-to p

Alur Jacob's Scholiinn on

}a|
I

IHK

IREEGUT/AR YEBBS.

93

These auxiliary pronouns are sometimes contracted

and

affixed to the verb; as,

&^Lo, ^zJL^b thouart

slaymg, second pers. sing. maso. and fem.

^L^o

for both genders in the first


pers. plural.

The substantive verb added to the

^u?

participial

form

will usually express the imperfect tense;

as,

r>

looi

^Lo

was

lie

slaying.

to the prsBterite
a

tense; as,

it

But

if this

will usually

verb be added

make the

locn

^^U> he had

pluperfect

slain.

Tho pluperfect tense will not always be determined


in this manner; for it sometimes happens that the
auxiliary verb

is

thus found with the

the context will not permit


fect tonso.

it

In such case the

tense will be expressed,

praeterite,

when

to signify the pluperpraoterito or imperfect

and which of them the con-

text will determine.

IRREGULAR VERBS.
39.

LA&QE

classes of verbs deviate

from tho

fore-

going paradigm of ^^Lo, and present many irregularities in the process of conjugation.
They are pro-

duced by nearly the same causes as they are in


Hebrew, namely, by gutturals, which have been

VJ3UHS te OR

already noticed; by 1ho loiters Is**;


radical

being

Nun;

or

by

by the first
second and 1hinl

ilie

Fmlwd

radicals being the same.

of irregular verbs exist in

Hie

Syriac, Aral) in and ihe whole of thai

classes

saint*

Hie Jlobivw,

(Jhaldee,

family of

Inii-

guagos.

Wo liavo awn

thai

dcnoltMl, for thn wih*

is

and

is

liuully

1.

<u

of hr^vifv,

wu^,,

class,

it

for

sbii'l

aL, i^u

is

(Mnplo\e<[

\MI-I,,

M ^l*

thr

tlu-e

utitl

is

to

tin*

I,

letters hi

tuitldli*

tf \vhieh

i-

the

that,

In

/w

/>/'//rV,

and not

jLrf,

r lx*.

j}

or

as, ji

r>.

middh* of u \vord Olaph <H* Yud and


iho proawlinj^ lotlor crannt be boih wilhont vo\u-N.
This is ilw cK>ns(^{uene* of what is Kfaled in (1
for
2.

ihcj

in

fhoxo fornm when* two consonants wilhoul


r

tho Olaph or

Yud

beinty

\\\v

evisf

Olaph

See

|'

nuae

or

the anomalies which

be observed

\\hieli

iMiln-iil

begin ii ing a word must have a vowel;

//# AY////, fis

<f

rfidi'al

ihirl railiVal-*

flmsc* flui last rndirnl

for

(ir

de

to

td/.nim;

vt*rlis

by one of the

or the seeujul

In accounting

(his

Yud

rQ

^,

j^orj.;

which

in

13, W,D

'^io

The oh^sos cf inH^ul;ir

the conjujcaiifui,^

thus,

(he verb

v<uels
second

VERBS

would begin a

fc

syllable,

quire a vowel as

much

OR

95

i-3.

and would consequently

re-

as at the beginning of a word.

This vowel of the Olaph or Tud is generally


remitted to the preceding letter; but when an ad3.

dition is

made

the end of the word, to avoid

to

the concourse of several letters without vowels, the

Olaph or

Tud

begotten,

o^Ul

retains its vowel

thus,

^z]X* lie was


if,

were corroded,

they

**+] I

In the Aphel, Shaphel, and their passive con-

Olaph or Tud is changed into Vau5


which coalesces with the preceding ? and makes the

jugations, the

diphthong au;
5.

as,

Olaph and

Tud

are dropped in the future first

person singular of the Peal conjugation

I shall

eat, for

^oa]]

tL]

In other parts of the


the initial

u* is

I shall

fut.

changed into

I ;

beget, for

Peal,

^os)

as,

and the

] .

infra,

as,

Verbs Ia arc regular in the Pael and Ethpaal


conjugations, which are therefore exceptions to (5).
G.

7.

is

In the Peal conjugation the vowel of the Olaph


*
In the pass, parin the preot and of the Tud

ticiple it is

in.

the ono case, and

in the other.

In

90

VKIUS8

OR

1-3

i*0.

It

the impor. of verbs Jo in those oasos where the second


v
)

vowel

but
D]

% tho

is

when

future tense, namely,


first is

The

jn^iLions

is

ItmcnlwL

coded by Thau

is

iV('<jiu

ns,

first

iw

iho

*
i

Ethpccl and Eihpnnl con-

tho

-*jzzl he

t*] lie look*

is

oksorved in Iho

tli

sometimes changed into z

Ls

first

the fioocmd vowol

and when thn second


Olapli in

IH

thm^ mow*.
-

1hc

A similar rule

tf# //tew, inasc.

"

Ml

as, '^osj

the second vowel ho

if

8.

first is

as,

tLL] fron

Tndotd Olaph pre-

ntly cliniiKwl inlo

Thau

for

tho wuko ofmij)hony.

Yud

Olaph or

1),

'

in R( neral in
k

or

ilw middle of a word

in

Tho

lull

<r

is

soiwtimrs cluui^

into the ionuer.

Tho verbal!

he dt^ttrtfilt iiiukva

ito

umod nf

iniju'rativ*'

Peal conjugation thiw,

Similarly

M /r

Th(; *^ of
as ofli'U

n^ulur

JIM

''Vijj

it

vcrli,

In

tlio

when

(Hi|,rlit

ami

wtich (SUHCH ilio

t^

it

iiKsmrf

luivi*

Zsiin

l>,y

Ji

ili<*

vowel of Lomutl

pansivd

the \owol

rt/w, 1ms impor. |i

[uirt.

f<*<j<i,

w*2

luis th

vowel fhi
HIUIII*

in

rulo

////v/

anui*y ut

flic
is

withnut <*m-

r4*mitk'd to

Xain;

Pi/al tho radical ** in nonto

iuntod of*

an,

uaAl /^A/,

Itoitu

vcrlm
li.

i,

tl*

hi

VERBS ^3
Tud

remitted to the
tn is

ooi*

in the verb

the second radical

97

has no need of the vowel

not pronounced, and therefore

is

*;

its

because

vowel

is

There are however forms in -which the

first.

retained without the Unea occuUans ; as,

we have

In lie imper.

The Yud remains


^5^| he

in the

Aphel conjugation in the verbs

The verb

^o*] he sucked.

ejaculated,

]1]

changes the

final

into w*

w2u] he

as,

brought.

wu^&

the

drops

first

altogether in the Pael

radical

as,

01 as

the

for

he was faithful, in the Aphcl conjugation takes


characteristic,

so

Heb;

and

is

Arab.

P9*tfT,

changed into

imperai

thus,

^0*01

and fui Peal

believed;

as,

reject this radical in the

he knew,

flit.

^^o, imperat.^?

lie

Some verbs beginning with Yud


inf.

.DU

he

set, fat.

41.

Verbs

ou

infin.

^ ta ,

infin.

v^2\^D, imperat.

^.
i

The anomalies belonging


arc only few

to

the principal one

this
is

class

of verbs

the rejection of

Nun in certain situations, and tlie rule is this whenever Nun is at the end of a syllable and without a
:

vowel, according to the analogy of the regular verb,

OS

VtfRBK

^U
\

Wo

is rejected.

it

have

for U5Q3JJ
*

for caauj

impor. Toal

tlio

iho boginning of
atti.

The

of

reason,

^s

Nun

Ihro^n away
*xoa for usoru, caa

as,

1^1 lor.

is

elision is

this

and

The

it

Ptu

lithpool,

thcvolbws

lias

fc

and

its

lor

mvl\ a

iw^locstcd

in

and Kthpanl <'onjKJifiuns of

those vorlw are quiio n^ulnr in

Verbs of this

l>mi

ai

Hw

porhQ]>R

va])idi<y in

diffioully of pi-onouncslnf? it \\li\\


Rilualioti,

<n

*,

is

tlio

word

tlio

u&jc.

Fn snob eases UMI 2nd.

from V^EJ.
it-

uisio for

inf.

N(M~)nik 9

radical has kwlioi \vhen

In

^=J

Peal

therefore ful.

aw

class

all

ih<Mr forms.

not found

in IIu

nulical

lh

Khnphrl

pa8ivc oonjugation.

The vowul of

tlio H(<*ond

in

fttf,

and

im])cr. IVtil observes {pmornlly ili<*samo rule as regu-

lar verbs;
//^'

Juwft

thus,

lake,

fie

JBCJ

the

mil>

vowel

**&

lint

///'

O-M

At

jj U Jltwwl

Thorc^ nr<? u few excepifaiiM, hnvo \


2uj
token* in thn futwhich
tion^ as,
lunliweutletti
<*

and impcr*

The

^a-j, Zcul,

rule for the removal of

to voriw of this

(ilasH,

whcsu

radicals are the warno; nor

Nun

tlie

dou* not

jj>ly

second nitd third

when the middle mdieal

VERBS o^ or
is

one of the quiescent

99

*-i>.

letters

nor in some verbs

he ascended,

jcu^fio

is

from the obsolete verb


flit, uott j

is

He;

whose second radical

as, Sou, 3ouj.

anomalous, and takes some of

inM

gp

as,

imper.

*&&&

forms

its

inf.

Aphel.

Olaph, characteristic of the Aphel conjugation,

is

occasionally

retained with the prefixes; as, 2u*]<

thou wilt

down, from

"bring

42.

Verbs

o^

or u*^.

Verbs having Vau and those having Yud for their


middle radical letter differ so little from eacK other in
their conjugations, that they

may be

hended in one

letters

These

class.

both compreare sometimes

placed in such situations as to lose their consonantal


power, and defects in consequence arise in those forms
of the verb where that
1.

Vau

in the vowel
is

power

is lost.

most part rests


In such case whenever another vowel

deprived of a vowel for the


*.

required by the analogy of the regular verb, the

Vau

usually changed into

is

2.

,
,

2o*

Vau

When

Tud;

for
'

most part takes the vowel or *.


therefore another vowel is required by the
for the

analogy of the regular verb, the


or changed into Olaph or
>o}o for

as *p&Lt\ for

>oo,
*

fern.

Vau

Yud;

as,

taken away,

is

yw

for

lo*o, plu ^ttuo, -&U3.


&

H2

CONJUGATION OE VERBS

300

tt'ttl.

Prwt. Sinjv 3. innJU

fan,

L.cuiu.
PI UP, 3.

1111W(5,

1$.

fon.

2.

ftm

l.Colll.

indiiiiivt

Sii

(hipcr,

Plur.

Fut, Si

ii.

1.

tmm

fun.

^Qftj

1'hir, 0. ILIUM?,

,'t.

fun.

2. inutu*.

Purl,

act

pUMM,

Rid.

vi

&. foin.

ii.

Ktliptvl.

\>.

VS-a]

Etlipaal.

EXAMPLE,
Aphol.

<M

eat.

lie

101

EUitaphal.

Shapkel,

EshtapM.

Aloof

V.

7. *

k,l
*

>"a

n\*\nVn

^7
XOOA.J

,-ioZZ
"

*,

O^-D oZZ

IK

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

102

Poal.

Prujfc.

Smg.

3.

maHO.

3.

fern.

a,

fern,

3.

iasr,

U.

ft'iu,

Plur.

hitinilivi*.

littler. tSin

ffUJ.

I'liir,

IVia,

Fut

I'lur,

J'urt

IS.

xnnw%

3,

fern.

I*

com.

-'}.

ititiHC,

.'K

ftun.

U,

fotii.

I,

Coin,

Ethpcel.

07770^*

70^
*J
A

77<

>*

7^7 0<H
*

>.

77<*r
*A

70^*
.

1770^

1770^
0^770^*0
*
*
2

ft

0^*^
7

'71^

rt

1770^7^
1770^7

80T

104

CONJUGATION OP VERBS ^a. EX.


IVul.

...nni

Afel.

he went forth.
MhlufaJ.

?rwt. Siuy. 3. mum;.


3. fern.
2. matte.

2. font.

1,

I'lur.

coin.
7 7

& maw.

ooo]

>ZZ
7 7

3. loin.
*

uaZZ
77

fi-iih

,-noZZl
Tniinitrivi\

ImjK'r,

nifiwi.

S!iif(.

fwn.

.,017)ZZ]

I*lr, tuust:.
ft

Kui,.

Siitft

it.

IJ, Jiiiur,.

ll,

IlULSt',

-*.

feu i*

Plur. 3, JIKWC,

furl, act,

It,

font.

S.

maw

li.

ft'liU

1.

corn,

toodZZ

UDQOJ

VEUBS

Qi

Olfc

105

wi>.

In the Aphel conjugation the Van is changed


into Yud ; the Vowel % which belongs to Van, is disci
3.

changed into % and this vowel


ceding letter

remitted to the pre-

is

as, yLo] for

There are some verbs which preserve the o in the Pael and
7

Ethpaal conjugations; jo> he disturbed, >o>Z| he was disturbed,


lie

joined in matrimony.

Vau

In the part Peal the

nounced Yud.
the vowel

When the third

*
is

changed into Olaph, and

is

changed into

*
.

is

radical is a 'guttural or

See

pro-

Risk

37.

Throughout the Ethpeel conjugation z of the syllable z| is doubled, except in the 2nd. pers. and 3rd.
pers. sing. fern. fat.

This is the same as in the Ohaldce,

except in the latter language the duplication


by, the

Dagesh

is

made

forte.

The verbs of this

class are

not found in the Sha-

phel and Bshtaphal conjugations.

There are some verbs having the middle radical Vau


which are not conjugated after the paradigm ; namely
3

(1)

Those which have Olaph or


third radical; as,

IOA.

Yud

for the

he was equal, ~o> he


X

was dmnk.
(2)

Such verbs as

*^offl

he desired, IQ> he rejoiced,

;d* he danced, ^a^j he acted wjustly,


*
*

In some verbs a difference of Signification

is

markec

108

CONJUGATION OP VERBS

oi>.

Peal.

Fuel.

Pnet. Smy,

"5,

mawc.

&

fern.

-. frru,

1,

I'hir.

com.

'I.

muse,

Jl.

finn,

ii.

iniust',.

a.

Ami,

m 7

J.

a*o

com,

JaimiiJvi',

Sin;?.

HUM',

>cueZZ]

i<-m,

riiu\ xiuihc.

ftMlU

|(

t*

<

>CUOI
* v
.

fi'in.

>OU6Z

-. IlilKiC.

r,

3.

>oloZ

num.
v Sfl.i.Ql
ft

2.

* v

yucu
Part, act,

770^07^

1
[7 atf

IOG<%g; in so

[7^
60T

110

VETIBS P,

the Olaph
thus,

is

2^^

cither taken

ZuX^.

that Oloph

Yud

into

seldom found in the middle of a word

is

beginning a

away or changed

This arises from the circumstance

syllable, or quiescent in the

middle of

syllable.

2nd, Participles form the

fern,

to the rules given in the Chapter


fern,

ll^,

as,

fl^

l^*.

fern.

JJL^>

3rd

3rd. Olapb in the

conjugations,

gender according

on Nouns;

pcrs. sing.

of all the

priot.

oxwpf ?onl becomes Yud


t

quiescent in

*
;

as,

w2^s

4th, Tin*

infnK

in other respects

Olapl)
',

IK

ii

fn ibo im]K

fit.h*

iw

subject to tlio

is

ii

Yud

Bui

and Uthpool

INwtl

mkcK

*-Xx and tJ^ 4.

rule; but

regular.

r.

chnngod inlo

in ilia lattor

lt

in

ilu %

Hin^. masc.,

former

it refits

a diphthong with
ilm

in

oiltor

v
;

in

thua,

coTgugations

Tn tlw fom. " makes


Olnph rnnninH and WSJH in
in the plum! formn tlio third
udipbthonff ^lih M.
<*ith<?r tak< rt away in all tho
rad.
conjugations;
.

or passes into
In the

fith.

in

*
;

away.

^ ((uitwuMii;

Killed

In the

l\n\wr*

ftit.

nin^

movcablc;

an,

inaHr.

tcno and

but before tho


Itoibre

thim,

the

of |Ld or v*ia we have

participles,

aflixcH ^o

afilx ^

and

Olaph
it

IB

rests

taken

Olaph piascB into Yud

VE11BS P,

111

In participles joined with pronouns, the third


is changed into 4quiescent, for the most

radical

part in

In the

as,

plu.

have

<o2u\..

prat. Peal of
T

,7

them ;

wK7io]jo

is

the third person

we

Iu some instances
^P^the
are annexed
when
affixes
preserved

o^^and ciX^for

the Olaph
to

k*X^

as,

*0io TV*

oji^.

they loosed him.

they called Urn.

Some verbs

Mark

Acts

xvii. 14,

x. 49.

in Peal change Olaph into Tud, and

are declined as the prseterite of the other conjugations

thus,
Plural

Singular.

The verb u2u|


X

is

AN

is

not of the Aphel conjugation, as

manifest from the vowel

It is

being under the Olaph.


the Peal conjugation with Olaph prosthetic.

A few verbs of this class have


masc* of the imper.
*

In the

as,

AX

*-M

in the sing.

numb.

drink, ^io. swear.

3rd, pers. plu. praot.

impor. Peal,

and 2nd.

pors. plu.

some verbs take the paragogic forms,

h*

* r r

!
!

P ?

(f/

nn

U.V

7
F-'il'o.

Xp.
t

113

EXAMPLE, jL he revealed.
Ethpaal.

Aphel.

Etlitaplial.

Shaphel.

Eshtaphal.

0-^44

^4
n^N^

ft

A<vT>

11

VKUUS

i<

45.

Vcrhs

"s^.

"^,

/V/7/.s-

liavo the second

tthioli

awl third

radicals

the stnne lose the middle radical in the IVal,


Aphel,

Shaphel aad Ksliinphal conjugations. Tho


vo\vel ofthe middle radical expunged is remitted to
Ktlitaphul,

the

With

first.

exception of tins defect and a

tin*

peculiarity in (heaef.
is

The

retrnlar.

quite

pm-t,. Peal,

lie

Kthpec'I,

whole, inflexion

and

Pael

Etlipattl

gal inns n-tain Iwith the radicals, and arc in (ivory

Hut lor

regular.

flifH\Vf>la,st

conjugal ions

tlio

ionns arc ntost ft^qucndy


///v^, ^v^lu^ hr ttt/i/frfw/, op; //6*

;ind Kl/i it"l juil


If*

.al^,
f

rh<

U>e

down

nml

inipcr.

up

s^b-A, rtnd

IVal

fill.

\o\\<-l

<|MM

lor

L-uHw**,

v5>

re<Mi\e on tl.

according to

(he

fornis hi

for

re*?,

rnlo laid

tin*

vcrlm

tluin,

In* //*/// *//r///,

<^

it'!// rft'ttiw*

///'

|J

In the ae|, jmrK


into Olaph, hut

l't*al

is

the middle radical

p,

changed

fivvj^v

the (llafth

wjnl> IH

'When an addition mmatlc

II,

end of this |irt M

usually taken

in

pronutineod as Vu<l; ihuH,

is

il

jn*imoniic'<d Jlt*-ffMi
(o Uie

]oai

th<^

as,

Olajdi wilh

^j,

^v^-

its

vowel

Hoind.inicH }

es|Hcilly in tho vcrh

iw retaitu*d,
%

twrtl; n.s ^jl,


fern,

t&li,

formed

The

as,
as,

(tan. j)|l,

plu. winwe.

J*il

is

regularly

passive

partiei|il<*

HottictiuM*H ilto iirnt

^t(\

-*X,
buu*

Matilu xxi.
O!it|ih

in

f<r

ho

^)^>
radical

5.

wcoml and

third radicals

OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
In the part. Aphel the middle radical

having the linea occultans

The

as,

^*^^l^o

is

sometimes retained

shadowing.

Olaph, characteristic of the Aphel conjugation^

times retained with the prseformatives

N B.

115

The

as,

n-^|v^

is

to

some-

kve.

3rd. pora. sing. fern. fut. of all the conjugations

both of

regular and irregular verbs, has sometimes Yud at the ond

46.

We

as,

The Objective Affixes attached to Verbs.


have already seen that different affixes

are added to verbs to

mark the person and nimber;

besides these, others are frequently attached,

may

which

be called the objective affixes; thus, ^Ai^Ls she


If the verb be intransitive, then it

has slam thee.

must be translated with some preposition to preserve


connection with the pronoun.
a Table of these Affixes.

its

When a Consonant precedes

We will

first

give

the Affix.
Plu.

Brag.

*!

<JL

imper.)

(^JL

imper.)

Oi

2nd. pert. masc. Prat., 3rd. per*, fern. Prat., and Nunpreced,
Sing.

HQ

masc. plu.)
2nd.

fern,

plu,)

110

CONJUGATION OP VEBBS
Aylirl

Ethtaphal.

Pnu*.8in&3. muse,
j

'

3.

fern

3. tern,
j

1.

*,

C011L

*J,

maso.

&

it Mil.

2, iiuwc!

1.

IVm.

V V

T
1.

IUIJUT,

Sni,".

rdju.

imiw.

pzz

PI

'

-P)

qco

Kiit.

Siu^.

,%.

optj

uiitw-.
[

3, f,'tu,

I',

tlUtHC,

1',

It-Ill,

piZ
T *

1.

crmi,

?Z2u
*

ftm

f!

I*lur. 3, inmk'..

ft,

fiLDZ2tt
7 A
ft

tpVvS/Z
#

y.

tttitu

ilSuZZ
t

EXAMPLE,
Shaphel.

i>=>

he destroyed.
Esttaplial.

PoJpel.

EthpaJpol.

>=>=
7

opp

OBJECTIVE ATTIXKS.

118

Ptwel preceding.
Iln

Yiul nnd in lh

ho necessary to extend ihc paradigm be-

ft will no!

yond the
liko

,l*eal

NeilhorwIH
Itir

eonju^iiion, for the others avo inflected

Wlu'ilever devinlious Uiere nrn will

it.

Fuf.)

it

be,

1>

^fivcn.

neeessnry to{;iveexniuj)Iosofirre?u-

exeepl thai elnss di'lhem which have Olnph

wlw,

for iho third radical,

nnd of

Htrikitiff peeuIiariiieH,

Tho

first

ailixofl

of lh

would

1)0

hieh, on aoconnt of Homo

v\

pariicuhir notice nnmtlmtiikon.

and second persons of boih jumihors


through both ih( lenses do not take, the* objective
saincs

]Krs(n, otherwise, tho HiKtiifldation

rwijjroeal,

which

!H

usually

x])n

RWl

l)y

certain, (jonju^ations*

Tn the pwl. the third

and <jtd, one


;

also

eacli

]xm
the,

^^10

There

is

of tho see, porn. phi. pnil, of both genders do

not receive tbo

ttflixcH

tpcr

and ^01; instead of them

aro used tho gopurato pronouns ^j|aiul

The

two forms,

simple and tho other tho

of them takes tho affixes.

a mas. parago^ta form

Verl)

phi. fcnu has

^]

following trnuspoHition of vowelb takes place

in receiving tho objective afllxon

119

OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
V

becomes

Praterite.

47*

maw. ^S^LD

3rd.$ers. sing.

^2

he has slain me,


thee, rnasc.

you, masc.;

-oX^
v

o\jLo

maso.;

......

them, masc.;

Ihee,

......

yow, masc.; ^sti^fro

......

ATO,

AiXi^

^1 ^^

......

......

hast

tJiou

%m
Ifcm maso.

she has slain,

^S^lo

-aMi^U>

......

......

^U)

them, fem.

3rd.pers* sing. fem.

masc.;

fem.;

you,
^oj]
*

us,

......

thee, fom.

Jier,
......

he has slain.

thee, fem.;

......
......

her,

^m,

you,

fem;

cn

^wl

fem.

sing

slam me,
CH^^JD

^i ^^u=

......

......

her

^0%

^oa)

fom.

OBJECTIVE APPIXKS.

Ikon

muse,;

<-*^^J

<**]

prr*.

fnn.

M/w,

......

masc.

oJ^Io

......

///^, fern.;

"

v
,

muse,;

^u^o

......

///;//,

fim.

fl

......

ninttf,

hint,
rr^l

AZC^w

l&fc

......

..... ////'/,

fiim.
......

^4] ois^o

......

A/?/

^Qa)

oik^p

M**w* t

......

W/w, fom. The

taken tho adiKOM of tlw

mane.

///

oth<*r

mane,;

form lMHJOiin

2nd JMW.

Hirif(,

timtus

......

yw/, fern*;

The other

w^

forttt

taken ihe afiixoH of tho 2nd,


JKTH,

bwmun#

HIII^.

maw*

t'UMj

'/^//

.....

'//

c
r*

*/"///

S;w

*
;////

wfl(/ v/T*

OBJECTIVE AWTXKS.

122
P/u. nwnb,

w^O^OS

2mL

pert* wane,

Or w-OJO^QS

......

or *-*oi-aa^ao

Mt\

^aii^OjC

......

//////, en

......

mr

or ^qui^afljs

^O^LO or
...... //////,

...... ///v.

//^r* fVin.

,,.,.,

/it'/

1
.

thy*

nuiHO,

al^cs or

pcrs, f<nn,

or ,iU^ajS

......

Ol

LiaioS^Ai

......

/^

fern.;

<ni^o^ or

OBSERVATIONS
;irr/.

mast*.;

0>r

per*. /tow.

iaaS&oa

128

OBJKCTIVK AFFIXES.

X
//<w, finu.;

......

masc.; ,-*ail&w

t
//////,

CrUU^tNOJ ,,,.,.

Parliciplrs

///'/'.

nn

seldom founil with

th

nlUx<*; wh<*n they are, tho mrHliiicatuin


is (lie

name

Hwy

as thai for noun*.

with //J^>*%

11 will

1* olmcrvcd from

ihat vi'rhB nml nounn lmv* ni^nrly

chan^H;

^us,

(bus,

\vhnt

in UP (s<u* p. 110),

\\\(\

wmw

WMsonil

thi

vouri*!

Hlx<%

siniilnr to

\\\I'H']} is

raiiirnl to

of Imth

({iMidivji

o rceui vim % and


first ntid

meond

Uw

wliorr

in

In

w^ond

V^;

Olapli

And Ynd

)K>tli

rud* it'tnin

it

in

^&,

iouiul in

to

h'tliTH

third jH*rHOi jihtnil

prewTve

tmrwrna* plu,

of a vowel, thoro Oluph


',

tin*

JH

put l*c*k on the flrut ltinrv


of UIA fern* in tekim ft*Ay* The

Imviiig Olaph or

may to referred

*hm

in

V(rl>H having* with tin*


v

v<i(l

vowH.

lofp*tlwr without a

sv

ri'iuits

tin*

it tok',*i flu 1

*xnmpli
1

In iho uthrr )HrsonH of the win^. ilir voMcl

on

1h<> for<fjoin^

Vud

for the iirnt radical

for wlimutviT %6 in (Htituitf


*

luui

htivo th

and Yud
wtmc*.

*
j

wlum

OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTIVE
Pool,
first

Aphol and Shaphel

manner

The

i*mo

affix

which oud

is

the

conjitKiifions retain

vowel immoveablo, but the Heeond they

in tho same

tho

AFft'IXfcft.

(linnet*

as in Peal.

used after Yud,

in o sen-vile; this is

the

**a

after those

<*nse

throughout

coiijiifjationa.

In

Peal

t!io inftn.

tlio

Innt

vowel

except with the suffixes <oa and ^^s

is

taken nway,

hut

if it

us

iaverlm having Vau <he fte<ond radieal, tlie viw*l


remains. In tho other conjugal ions having the tennination o z is added willi the suffixes.

Tho impcr. of all the conjugal 1011^ wherr the tnitldle


or \ doe* not
radical Ima anyone of the vowetn %
chango
the

form

it.s

in the sin^,,

nnd inm'ttt Vud before

affixes.

The vowel

o in

tho plu. nuiw-,

in

romiited to the

iirnt radical.

Paol, A])liol

and Hhnphel etmju^aliuns,

vvlirn

the

hnpor. a^t <H with the pr*l. east away the \o\if! of
i

tho 2nd* radieal before the suffix PH;


bring him.

or

an

as,

But verbs having the middle


well an Homo pHratyo^ir foriUM,

^-^^-o^|

radir;l

1,

retaia ttu*

OH,

Tho
.i

M*
and

pern, of both
JJrd, pern,

KIH^

wan bora,
i>f

2ntl,

JHTH,

both Kewler

neeond vowel before UtealJixoK

aitd;

but

it

OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTI VK A FFIX KM.


is

lost in ihe

all tin* fornui.

The wrb IL
r

Tho forms
Imp.

end

'whieh

Aphel and

Pael,

irith

in

},

annexed

Shnjiln*]

in

.')r<L

<o thr vrrlr, as,

In tho Tuf, Poal fho

^?

the

rr

Tluwo

iw

>

t.\^
*

>

**

v uliii'h

channel Into
|>at

cruik^i;
'*

ending in

>

m,j
sinty,

prrs.

^u^, ^i^

is

removed, although

forniH ofth<jfvi*rh

IVal

vix M prcd.

nmsc.ca.st nuayl, Iml wtaiu the unvel

and

23

The remaining persons koep

others.

bo<h vowels In

"

j,

in

Much as <Jo

and [mrlicip^ vf]wn (hry im* the {il!lxifH, ai^


iUMniHiomed to elmn^' into ^, tlic vowel liein^ refutures

iaine<l

us,

There
in

^*i*X^

Maoka^
Tito

yA^j

or

they eliatw

o into

^o&^ %NaoaS^

fonn u% which

pm*t

(his jiecudmrSty In the fornin tenninaiiui;

in

that

o,

itt

or

co

plu. of ail tho oonju^ationa oxt^ept Poal,

either expun^od,
%

and

a,

**ioJL^.

In ihoHO pnrtB of the verl> which end


IH

c|;

the termination of tho 3rd,

ed before (ho afllxe* into cu;

}oth

or

tin,

in ^.,

and the ^ boooinen

arc retained; ai

aj&jt

lie

vowd

inoveahle, or

CONJUGATION OF

120
AflU Sing.
Prut.

VEIVttH

|3

WITH AFFIXES.
2 K.iiu

Mn^*.

mm A

IVftl. 3.

,'l.

ffllL

JJ.

IUIIKC.

font,

1.

com.

!-K

nmw,

Vlur. il

'

*v

ft'in.

r>.

r-*^.

k
I

ii,

urn HI'.

a. fcmi.
i. I'dtlt,

"
,

I*IMT,

ftwiw*.
Siiitf,

^t

t
.X

"

^
.

<A

fciu.

Tliir.

t^,

I),

mu'e

Phir.

Ui*luiiiH

tlm finn

<l*

the rirular

vi*rl*.

I'lur,
r

flto othiir

fin |>or,

3 nuuut.

pomourt follow

Hii^, ninxc,

Pitir,

fl'f.K

X
***^

faf

,'t

Muse.

127

revealed,

HI-HI,

1.

llur.

"srSi ...*^
loAAs
I

o^
r^
5

SUiM wro

j.iliwsl witli lln<

ho wtim muniH
1

r&

r.

'

K.I.I.

OBSERVATIONS ON OBJKCTIVB

328

Thoro arc

parts of th< verb which follow tin

many

wry

regular forms of ^jLo in

gogic forms,
2nd. pare.

the

shift,

3rd.

and

rospoct, viz. llio pnni-

2nd. prrs.

2nd. and 3rd. pon*. plu. mam*. uncl


inf.

of all the conjugations, the

iiiHtfincas

arn mr

of the Pealcofij. whoru

U. This

tluj nflixos;

bolh ^cndorH;

oi*

to

^ol^

KB,

lli<

nrul tin*

3rd* pors, plu.


nwl,

!lnl.
*

Olnph

in

v*uio|

*is,

remark applioM nlso

IVal

ilio

flu*
it

roininod with

winij. ftin. f

ft*nu fut.

inf.

with in

and

Isi.

fom.,

MUJ:.

jiuro.

plu. print.

////;v

An/v

M\t

liud prrs. plu, Imp,

/^y^'

John

//////>

\i,

II.

Thin custom of preHcrvinp; ()l;tph I'H also fuiuxi in the


pnrtic\ JVnl IIH well at* in tho Tiiip, sin^. and plu. of nil
the active conjugations; aw, u*U^

It ;

**ijatt

W^t^ m^y Cant

ii.

tho

ttttttixos

auothor

Hoffhmn, howcvT, douUs

tltn

that tho Yiul him ppit into

thnni^h
In

(*ur.

JoetoAs
*

wing, fimp;

In

xii. ft!

vhs.

utted ffr

of

cmvli*iwmi

t!t

w*

^wo^

luivtt

i*i[HK*MiIIy

IK

t^xi

isliroi-H.
tin

Iwfiin*

in l*n!> Muttb*

MW*

t!ii,i

Sn-

hi*

of

nrt'l

lf

(lix<*i

i\

*('

ujinim

fli'r

plwn

<rnw. S\n
lln-

ii.

ix,

wmwfiwc* mUo

in

i-Kani^l^

I!HI

l*s,

i\w lu^t

truth nf tbin, mul

ihi*

/ w/// i**

'

Yud

?///',

If.

In the futures, vvhcro YuJ qnuwtiut


before

//r////yy

wf

p.

V*l Iwing

iv

DOITBLV DETECT? VK vKKns


with

tin*

much more

affixes

Mf-7/ /w/i*f/

40,

The

A/M*

I.H

fre<iiipnily

than

I2i>

tin*

jinny IJL',I";

found rather than

irregularities in

\erhs,

lun

il

'

1JH

<pn

'

J!n\*!d\

inir n**

nuliivt

ihr letters Olnpli, Van, Ywl ur Nnn,


sitiintioiiK is dro]>|)f'(U or by

vOtit-h in

observed, nre

i>r(MliHM<l 1>y

third rndic-als

Ilio

T!MTM

wtnu\

nioro than one* radical, which

Of our*

<jUit^<Hnjc(^

a,,

it

In

IIKI.V

1>*

rtMf

hni

mihjrci in elision

fhn

will mil hitppiMi at

disappear or I
qmVsmilj for the principlrK on whiVli thrM* jM*tMiiiariiufH depend cannot operate ^iinultaiteously hy fiy
Utno- that all

ilm letters will

eonihinalion of circumstances so aw
edect*

will therefore

follow thai

It*

produce thU
lettern uf

HOIIH*

the root must reniain in every ^mrl uf theeunju^tion,


und that in general no two eoiisecuiive letter^ ran he

U Mill he
the sarne tiine J4nhje<t to defeet,
cle,n( to consider a few itiHttnicm of donhly
at

whiah

1st.

mny 1w

Verlm with the

third Olaph

a,

snfll-

dirktad

ftrni

radical a

U** /^* /^/yV/w/,

Nun

IMIC!

thr

Hthpeel w^jZl^ uher*

Ohipli
ifiilin)

JH

changed into Vud; Aphel

Nun

in

im^ilatcuL Ho

t*

when) (ho

ISO

IjrADItfUTKKAl. UIKHS.

2nd. Vorlw

Olnph

as, )Z]

U, Aph.

h*2ul

having the

first

fat.

Peal

///

WM/>,

irilt

lco].

and the third


/ //r^v> ^rr>/v/ 4

^/ro/v,

iinpcr, *JLcu

jw/vvf/' t

MJ,

inf,

W^.

>

Aph.

\af

inf.

MI,

///y/^ ful.

ol

&*&

furfw, ]&]& fo

///'

ini|Hr.

radical Yuri

///?

it

first

}&*, or ^ic*

as,

radicals

Ufci

Inf.

ltiM<*ntwl< ful.

//r

Thosn with the

Olaph

UK

third

which possess the defects both


|3

JJrcl

and

A ph.
w*L

imper,

ii

v-*^:J,

Ver))K

'ltd,

11*

Okiph.
O^D, inf.

having the wrond and ihird

h? foplHuh\ wln

ful,

HAID, iinpcr. Mi)a f


1

rjnl,

ii(*f

pnrL

pern,

Jlw,

^*IJ

nidifvtls

plu.

A/*

*
,

fut

itf, inf.

IDCH

W^

impcr,

*41,

Aph,

^B1 f or

haw the shortened form of the

ful.

|M, an

well

an the ordinary

The

Hyriniift

have some \erlw composed of more

than Uiwjo leifont; liny arc not

Hebrew and Arabic, an


rootn*

of n

1
-

elw'lly derived

from

an in

trilitenti

Thoy arc formed by (he additi<m or repel it ion

lottor,

ami undorgo liltleorno

the prcfixc-H arul nllixrH arc

f.

numwmw, and

By the

ftllernfion

tvhtm

annexed,

repefiiion of

one or tun of

tin* lettern

<;rAi>ttiuaim,
of tlm
i

Irilitoral root,

and

Van

am

WUHS

the

or the

io); thus,
'

Kfc^/"' tlMgywl

he

W,

(s<**

I'll

those CI^CK

chiefly

ho second and third radicals

in Iddlo radical

MUJ<*.

ftfottfj,

MMjuwf/wl, from

mtft

dhl

if/'f.fH)

*mv

<

It

/ry.

or

?flc

//

///v/r/Av^'/,

//^/^A*,

nr

Jroin

,r^- //> ///W

///,vv'//^

/*/;//,

kn MTII JVow

\\ill

following twamplw, that

llir

or

from .^**

tl'M' nml

u-^n^nil f^flVci

ol*

tin*

tin 1

io #ivr tncroa^'d inlt n,siiy to <hr signik

in

duplication

fVoni

fication of the orij^inal word,

IriMtunccH of tivool'tlti? radical* iM^n^n'prnUt'rl

If,

aw, yiVnSMZl
A*"

rfmutiwl

A/?

ilwnM&IJht

v^^*M

HI* Home appear


as,

^j)

and

///'

thM\ from

fatty

itfwffiftwti frotn

from

HluiMCi

y^

s^fA

lo lc <'<iupoiindiMl

//v/w ;j/// //*

///'

**

two

* *<rl

Ac iNMtltwt,

IV*

By

the addition of n

li?ltcr

to tin*

of a word.
(1)
r*//w/r?

y^ixw

(i)

from

us

Thin
(#}

*&&

y>; at,

lln Arnbi<i

aw,

in

Ac

*flni

//w

7>/^</c ;/^>/%

+&S&BI) he
*

///

Intott'iiwl)

Ac

tn'j/*'tl)

pt'olmMy a variety of HhapbcL


jlfili

Ac A/^A/, IVom

from

PAUTICLKS.

1-'W

The
of a

hitter

word

Van
as,

sometimes inserted

is

///

ycsi*

havo

\vo

from

^^

//r?

"

fi

*-

from fax ya; n,


$ ;

twitf/*

AMIic

of

<*n<l

wonl

:i

from Z^

ti/ittt'fff)

vv*

//*'

pc

middl

/<//#

//*

jw t
//^'
/

pfwrcri'tlt from
r///v/ t from v *^*

//<

^micu.

^s^;^

an,

Awtmf

//<*

p0

clwuffrtl,

*^ai**l]

/fr/Wfv/,

plwil, from the root ,&

iu the

/^'

find sunu'tinn's tin*

^ /MUM*; *+t**

/it

.Y//

'.

or L*M!

kind MI*

//wr/fr, hc/aw/It.

-*?rl
^
*

H
only

is

umiwfMNury

oi)H< i rv<'

nt

"*^P>
i

to ^i

tlmt t in UK*

follow in #(>ru*nil

01.
Iftidnr lliiH

n used

in

i^nu

thr,

t Ofthw.
^l <// <w/fv,

duwu

fur

lH^omj>*t la*ndod words wliirli

^xplainin^

Advorl*H,

Initl

principle*

I'AHTICLKS.

may

purlH
?,

fontin of this

(.'miiiuon

inoilifvin,^

of a wntrnri',

and rmuMriin^
f

nj

nuhnu^

t'r^pomUou^ Cunjitni-tiuus

uiul

ADVHJIHS

hi {Jt<*c/trJ,(t
!

or

//////

^>-*^

///i//',

^ p

//r;/

///'A

*-

2nd. Ofplruw.

whhth wty /

tllHirf

^Z

////vv.

dttwrfa o

or NN

rt

^
wr

^>,

>? wtetbtrf fwjff

A^ / (which

forftuul

and tho pwHOimt pronoun

any

m^tiv^

tin

ocn)

A-ao i.o

fmrn
5

tlto

^ii^

w,

mtrorb
/M l/*

tulvcrhmay lx fornuMlhy adiiing

termination lul~; an,

UM-

SOUK*

hvpositiotiK

AT,, uiul others arc


niouty used nro

iiro

iiivlixftl

wpnrah
/>/,

i* /#,

In

iwun*.

vi-plis.

wonk Tlnw imM


-diii A;,

<*////,

row-

^A

or

or

<t(/((htxfi

V-

f/V//, */C|

+&*wtiu it!tui
t

A(;/J;/v\

to,

PI

(/

//<//,

Thn ItrjVrtimH
Mcrf/

HJ), rfu/r/' fe V

arr

fa*

/////,

lot

imr/ ikas / ;/m^

}i

^v/

Vs !

ADVHJIHS

hi {Jt<*c/trJ,(t
!

or

//////

^>-*^

///i//',

^ p

//r;/

///'A

*-

2nd. Ofplruw.

whhth wty /

tllHirf

^Z

////vv.

dttwrfa o

or NN

rt

^
wr

^>,

>? wtetbtrf fwjff

A^ / (which

forftuul

and tho pwHOimt pronoun

any

m^tiv^

tin

ocn)

A-ao i.o

fmrn
5

tlto

^ii^

w,

mtrorb
/M l/*

tulvcrhmay lx fornuMlhy adiiing

termination 2u|~; an,

SYNTAX OF SIMM' \\TIVLs.

UM5

Ifcir.

//<ww r/

the waiuo

Hvr. ;J.'I:K

Kplir.

/('//',

//>//

iwth uf (j

///c

u here the absolute uml eonst. states ha\e

s,

ih<*

wiis

Ileh. 3U7. 2; 1*3*

ioi'iH,

p, ^ws,

air

o xst

y-cu,

y*,

mid tnans

Hocond hnw the iorw <f an ncljiTiivo; ss ^.^


//w

tuJ-cu>
///////

ILuk* 1 xxii.

^^\

/v/////

rj/<\ Alaftli. v,

2.

TlMtr'Uitiv<M^ used

ii"{

T0; {i*t^> ^i^

/////

ll.

<*niy jicti\rl\, htit pns^iv^lx

i.e. tlir liouit \\lii<'li isplli in tin- i;vit. is unl ;ilu;i\s |)ir

subjn'if
i,\. SI I,

htii

tin* f>hj<'<

11, u<* haw*,

MHM of

^>

,'i

ph'cnlinit'

^AA;

i^aiui

**^liS;yJ

fa UH' wrt'Mffj

of

Mtilrtf'hH

onl^!

/,v/^//

pfi^
;

noun

////'

!M# En

i^ib

(at) tint

nil

nreiifttte tleseriptiun,

of (his euuslrucliou; us, l:ru


i,

do sn
*/3*il.2M*s

xui. !.

noun iHofien louud

atwoluto ntuiiv \vlten

it IH

in

th

follwved hy

a preiKmtti
i* (**

,/J'<w,
*

Mutlll,

HIV.

J!

Jnil,

injury (lining

wlil^tn rrw
Although pmp<*p nnm
( ounii*it*H, cities,
of
th<*
imw^H
fivers, \<
y<l

Hake of

;s

JilS

f^ijS

Mi'

lor th

SYNTAX OK

whw

*4^

wo have IA*P

2 Tun.
^-po,
*

for

HH'JANTIVIX

St

iii.

for }a

The

2*

KOinetimos separated fromlhr nouu; as, |p>


1

Tim.

wlinv w<

10,

i.

haw

Tin* (Ipfnuir slnlo in


(!

ly inti'iidrd

3i*. for

.....

*aa

]>riiuary oflin

its

tvxpivss a (l(linitc* MMISP,

<t>

/,/.

it

isu.sril

to dirod th<j atlmtioii lonjmrtit'ulnruljjii'l orolyrris

known

cither

liy

tiTUvorwilily or

jiroM^niiifiH!!*!

[wviottHly by fionic riivitinstan^r

bony IMX cwMi Ito^


occurs in

all

Us Syrinc version,

It

in

drf,

1h<*

Mate

Hr.lu'ow nriirli
this

/A

/ w//

ho !Hibr*w

1'Vom ilm same com,

soon thai

Syr noimn nrr put


uln n' (In*

niuiuM'otis in*i;mt'<*

iti

tu Iht'corn'spondiujjc

M'liii

tluui in

many

also In

may

parison

U*^**

(^bscrvdd by com]ini*iiiK th<

b(^

wl, iifututy
\vilh

(ho mw'H whrrn

}il

;IN,

or

has IMVOJUI* of

ail

probability

o&mtjilim arc ibimd


1

rmiploymli which

hM<int tt>

it

whew

wiiwU

iMoiiiitli'il,

much woir %www\


orient filly had,

iho

Hhovvthal

it

d<*Jlnita Jurja is

and thtutlmohttc

arc put itdiwn*imluutdy for two anotltcr; for

no npjMirni rrftsou

why

(Mi<^

should

and

lluw

in

)jav( v hr(Mi tinrnt ia

Th rmuwjiiwici* in that to
1^
cortrun ruio ran
^ivcu lor unin^ the driinito Mnt\
ptrJWciu'o (o thi other,
1

At tho

limn

(nuiio

ftf

uud

its

lhcr<^ tn

it

wu

nnnl(^y to the Hebrew n in very


no doubt in the mrly period of

Ixnuul by

*"

'
v
"

"

:
t

**<*L.
r

JJ

J
?
S

*
-

*J

s
;

^1

72

*;

*<

*
;

Uli'Hi'^
''

s
i
-':-.^
t

.:

"

"

!jl
?

s
J

*^

; t
i
.

: f

I
ff* *"

?**

-";ii =
i 1
"j
-i-*5
'

/ r . s
*

^
^

5
'!

7 Z
J 2
Iw
l*t

r^ii?;
*

^la
.'

*
1

'

I*

v- *

5 f

'it
^ *
ji

H:i^;; i'.rliiM;:
,

^f'.isS

nirM
*\
^

I
*

'

i
**

.>*"?:ftl

*
J

**

;^i

ft!

"
|H

'*

ji::t

!t
- :
:

8VXTAX OF StBSTANTIVLS.
such cases
]L*o>

as,

yjc/wMitt'/

f&Jaa*Z Mr'

//to///

!M>n\v,

iu

cunilocufion lor
HoviM'sil

xiii.

mtu

hy PhillipH,

p,

t{j*

luaiid

t*ir-

tliu

to tnl4 r\
>

ni*

nouns su con-

*9tolu)

///^/

oip>

5htr Jwob's

ttnyiwl,

sljitis

]sw

^o>Zu

KIT

1.

04111 vnlrnt to ^ "^'**

and wcoml of

wit

t/n>

xi.

serves somclim^s

const niffivr

V^l&u^

us,

be

JUT sonu'litnrs

\\orrts

^n tin- first
;

way

wliirli

1!io

6W, John

fl/

Thin construction

21,

John

a
1

)!&
or

o/' ///f

,/#/#/

Ijlik

*^*

usually prefixed 1o thefolUwinj* noun

is

>

130

Ki*liolin

*.

Tin* propor unnioH

of

nnu

not arhnit a drlinitr

ilo

few appear <o Iiav* it, l'caus* tluy (orminaio with Olnph
htit nuoh nouns an* in lit* al>Holuf<>

statis.

noun

purpose

put in apposition with another lor Hie

is

oCcli'limni; or c\ plaining

we frequently
when

plmnul
aw*

noun

later!

in

&.

after

manner nouns

in this

employed

iLuJjfr f/7// t

}tt}^ittlittttl)

afllx,

liml

more Hinirlj. Hence

Ht> also

K.i

tilth

like

nn

the m*lfetauUv<% tuny he

ot^o )^* the

;><w/>/<

///

r/

/Ar//>^

aHontenen ban Momotimw to

e,

(nuts-

1)**

hy wueh expansions as
/YW/WW/ fu, (lit tf which rttttihw (u,

into Kn^linh prefucuul

ttflCWtlitiff

4<t; UH,

tu,

irit/t

^ ^M
/

IdDta* *cu*i-o

w/W lw ywttlw

^/////

thtnt

(vuth rt'Hpeci to)

HIM*

Cjun*

neronlintf to) /Ar umttl^t' qf


i,

xi

<tll

thaw,

COXftTUUraOtf OF ADJECTIVES.

iO

In Hebrew Iho

n#

parliclo

Ls

sometimes found bo-

the subject noun, but tho Syriac has


rarely
it in this respect by the use of tho corre-

forts

imitalod

sponding parficln u. Nevertheless there are some


bem<* put before tho subexamples ofllw prefix

ai^
ject; as, \z+z]9 oiiuo

of

he

mw

John

xxvi, 11;

Vsz]

offence

See also Matth.

xxii. H,

A jtfiwf nftwv/h'MM ih<^


ft

]&&> has the

Oal. v. 11.

witked f

Wyvians have not, except


tlioiv version of the

levMNslanttrs wliielj nre lound in

Old Tcsiaiueni an<i which ntny be eonsequontly reT|M reiK'tidon (fu noun wmietlmcw denote** diversily or a nuiliiiuile

Aelw

uu

*^u
^f^c^
/
'

It denotes also
i

^*.\

^p

^1

x. 4(J;

as,

v*
ii.

4;
17.

4i8j

fu? v4*?X

^w*

0.

iliiiiiwitivu notniM

ti'rmtimUtm 10 *r uao;

a>

ur

often expressed lay the


;

Foiunl.

an,

l2c^ P ignorance.

They

are demoted by tho

|jop

mtttt Jimtoiiii
*,

Mark

coils,

a dislribuiive, WMISC;

put before the noun

tt

HUMM, John
4

Kulistuntivcw

Kotan

MMQHH

///

ttfJMcd wtlh mtny

Matth. xx.

partieln p

t^3 wM* dhon tongues,

ov

fltffc

tttaa!So ^ link dag.

My

or

\vhellw$r

\vhetltci*

they aro used us qualifying

they aro employed as predicate*,

CONSTRUCTION OP ADJECTIVES.
agree generally with their substantive in gender and
number.* The exceptions to this rule are the same as
in

Hebrew.

When

an adjective, or passive participle, has the


of the predicate, the logical copula being expressed or understood, it is put in the absolute state
office

with the same gender and number as its substantive,


w^Zcu^m M <n pa 3 my sin is greater
and before it ; as,

than

Gen.

participle

is

Occasionally the adjective or

iv. 13.

after the substantive;

put

as,

l^oL^

jn^o the feast is prepared. Matth, xxii. 8.


An adjective is usually placed after the substantive
which

it

qualifies

as,

]te*4 tlo$ the unclean spirit.

Some exceptions to this rule exist when an adjective


made the important word in the sentence, it takes
:

is

precedence of

its

substantive; such adjectives arc the

epithets of saints, holy

?*>*>

Ogatas

p-3o-

men and women, &c.


79/>0*

blessed Paul,

^0*^0

|2uiao^

as,

blessed

at

Mary, &c.
If an adjective, or passive participle be used as an
epithet, and it be found in the absolute state, the
Dolath

is prefixed to it; as,

ELnos. Ohrest. p. 76.

-AIJ

The same

poj the dry fish.

rule

is

observed with

respect to an active participle, used either participially or as

an adjective;

as,

lLJ ? |k$o> a high place.

Bar. Heb. p. 288.

Negative adjectives are expressed in various way&


1st

by p put before au adjective

m th<*

doftolte

st$,te,

<JOX8TRrf!TIOy OP ADJECTIVES,

L2

\vhni
,//////;

used. as uuopilhot; as,

is

it

)adh0

nuploywl as u

p*jU

J3f

adJHtfivo

A
Py

iujnttft'

licfiM-i

//to/,

iMiiMMlutt*
^

ft

somotimos oxpvossod
hy

is

lie? P?

Pj

irillitwl

found pn !i:'d to
i

tin 1

dwtti)

(M

part iciplr

pltiml nuruhor

Tl

word

i,(^.

blood-

as,

U*&

////

is

sri>

wmio

/*/'

Soo Horn,

Hub.

xvi- 21.

substantive,

use of Iho pronominal

vM? tnnlUfnd^ Aois, xv. 12;


rhirfpi'itmb,
f

Mnlth,

and an

put in tho

it IB

its

is

p> 7^7//-

together,

plawd Ar/rw

/^
w,

I^D

thorn,

gomW.

a ploowtHfio

Ao

mniofM.

i.e.

addod {o

iw

and maw*

^o

iiidMluoM in
;

p ? without, a

Wwx/,

suhsianlivo; as,

Hvc.ral KuI>H<ai)tiv(H

and

as, licoio

fr/V///r/

ji

//w, ]&LD

vv
ndj<'cti

Tho

and omployod as

Ktntii

Hitbsiaiiiivn;

|iit<
1

atljoctivo negative.

it

nw^lkMc.

aiijcclivp

n<"^ili\<*

ilio

ns *z*2Lte

negative

in its absolute state

ii

nltsoluio

t!u

in

is

tho

is (!o<l.

Hi>mtiu*s nmlcpH

nn opithrf

When

proclicailo, tliou it is ex-

pressed by placing P before


ns,

p bitlimitte;

U^si&i

iiMM*i>wltfmiblt\

is

wljHivn

h'wfhiuif;

fL^lc

ii,

p,

I;

|*a)

III,
>,

all
f

cii^

!KI.

In thn <mtpnmtivo dogrr^o thnws

is

Homctimow an

Hlipsw of tlw adjpctive by which tlm sort * or reason*


* V

IH

indicated;

M,

Itaj^

(clearer)

SYNTAX OF NUMERALS.
than the noon-day, Job
*

xi.

143

17;

idols and sculptures, (which are


^oo >o^t>o|
^f^QA
X
X

more powerful than the idols) of Jerusalem and Samaria, Isaiah x. 10. The comparative degree, which
is made
is sometimes to be otherby the particle

^
itv

wise explained than

\+o ^o
xviii.

it

ordinarily

oi

U*^D

placed before an
is too

The word

inf.

great
u*-J

to be forgiven,
is

as,

way

*^o!^ai

Gen.

be loo
,-i is

^^

|a/

iv. 13.

sometimes instrumental in ex-

pressing the superlative


i.e.

Lord ? Gen.

So also when

inn^ViS ^

as,

*+<* ]z>i

]toj

but iflhe

<Jo

long for thee, Deut. xiv. 24.

M>yjoy,

as,

Is the thing too great for the

14; U>o] j&s

my sm

is

as,

->Zo^

Cant.

my greatest joy,

-**> the

head of

So also |po=

iv. 14.

IIM^O fctpoo the Jirst-bom of the poor,

i.e.

the

poorest, Isaiah' xiv. 30.

A word is sometimes
tive

and adjective;

Bar Hcb. 335.

placed between the substan-

^ l^i but

as, t=>J

other languages the fern,

is

employed;

one thing Iha06 asked, Ps. xivii

54.

10

A*

&L}i)r

Numerals.

precede the thing

numbered, and sometimes follow


i.

as,

4.

Cardinal numbers sometimes

two men, Acts

the great king,

For the neuter of adjectives in

3.

]&]

*V

pU

it; as,

HF\
^V **M
*
*

wafer-pots of

NVXTAX

114
j

t ,

John

So also when thousands are to bo

C.

ii,

NUMERALS.

01?

numbered, tho wimo observation applies to the numeral

which numbers hem;


i

Mark

vi.

as,

^^

\*&*

and jliaL }:xk Mallh.

14,

fine thoimnd,

xiv. 21.

Cardinal nmnhtu'rtnro frequently found to


occupy the
place of ordinals.
*

,i

Matt h. xx.
Matih.

lit.

^^

JJ;

w>

W.

In

uf

nit

noun

In

number m

the

third hour,

numbers

plaocs cardinal

taJi* lo the
Jirsl

as, !j*

.Dan.

i.

21

IntMlMtliniil

tfa #h? ImNtlwtl tiHtlfvttrtli //mr,

(ordinal

at

//w//w, i.e. the tljtth hour,

many

Mf yw *lfw*

hi Ihi* r/wtt'

lieu

and the noun numbered precedes

onMmelive. state;

lii*

lliiczl

eighth day; so also,

i.e.

/w/v,-,

tui.

lor onlinaln,

the

ywr,

Mm*

///

xxvii.

are, lined

in

MM

&ba

^*+

wo have

3D,

i.

in <>if//i/9 i.e.
fifty irjtwfi

////'

lit.

Luke

In

l^o Hiiu, 2ujo

(tut*,

i.o.

Bar Hob,

fa the six

p. 100.

a few instance put before


tho eonHtruetivo state; aa f inMatth. iv.
in

its

25,

!, lit.

whn

OrduialH, likn adj<div(*H,


tives,

w,

l,lw ttirtl

Tho
IKJ

found

*wl ]LL&t
9

Kami) rule

(employed

tho

oftittti

When
mtmlwr,

Ix

joined to substan-

same gender;

in tho

llo-l

as,

Uiulz

\*s>4

third te<t*t9 Rcv.ri,

liu*

5,

observed for mrdinalw, whether thoy


eardinalH, or

whethor

llioy

perform

of ordinnln.
tho tiling
it

in

numbered proeodos tho

nfttmlty

put

in

the dof*

cardinal

tato;

M,

SYNTAX OF

P310NOTJNS.

Ear Hob. p. 22.


)^ jZoi one year,
Rev.

10.

ii.

state

When
is

Occasionally

as, Eu^z
tlie

it is

three years,

^*

fcfcL

Luke

thing numbered follows the number,

Luke

xiii. 7.

in the def. state; as, U2ol

The half
as,

xi. 9,

ten

iv. 25.

generally put in the absolute state

three years,

)al

found in the absolute

of

any thing
liS>z

cn^ao
11

or

half of my goods,

as, <-*!*

it is found
Now
]&t three days, Kov. XL 11.

and then

is

ordinarily expressed

]&ol

three days

by |/o^s

Luke

it

l*

as,

**co3j

and a

by

faitf,

ZCL^A

the

xix. 8,

In designations of weights, measures, jflnd times,


the noun which expresses the weight, &c. is sometimes omitted, though not so frequently as in lTobre,w ;
as,

fcS^ a thousand (stolcels) of silver, (Jon.


usms;
*
*

* *

xx. 16

whore the word

|LoZ is

understood.

N"S

two (loaves) of bread, where the

loaf

understood, 1 Sam. x.

13

^?^

deny

Mark

xir. 30, 72.

me

in Mickiolis's

three (times),

^aaol 2dZ

where understand

<.tat'

Ellipses of othor notuiB ore noticed

Gram.

55.

The

4 MO

word

180, and

AgrdTa

83*

Syntax of Pronouns*

logical copula, as has

been already stated,

is

frequently expressed by one or other of tho jxmonal


pronouns, aad that with tho Unea ocoullww*
But

when

existence

is

meant, tho gubstamtiro rorb

i*

luod,

SYNTAX OP

14(1

find {Ilia without. Iho li/wif occwllfttia; as, |ooi )il OLD

in

him wv
ill, COT

//'/!'.

and uoi

tsiko

omilhms under

iho liuca

the

first 1Hfcr when they express the logical copula.


001 and *^n also fm|ucntly mnit the vowel to the
r

preceding wovd, or oust

The WHIM pronoun


HO that iho fornu r
k

Iho

pies

ii
in

])laf!<

Jolm

John

x.

0;

copula;

as,

tl

w/

*ju

^i* 1f*&&

lh(ftu1)Mt(ui<iv< vorh,

prctTdinj; word; so

cno word.

instances,

latter occu-

^>'<?

dUe!pk8
Wli*H personal proiiounn arc put for

2H.

ix.

many

and the

.subject

of the logical
*>

<;/,

altogftthor.

repeated in

th

is

away

they Kotuctimoft (Coalesce with the


hut Ilio pronoun audit hecomo

Thu wo have wio

25, p. 01.

vS<*t

0*001

Clal v.

p.

204.

iv.

1L

utM

iii,

we

afllxoH to V(*rh, al though usually expressing

duiivc;

xv. lU,att

If

/ww M#,
nounu

iii.

T.

11.

an amis., yoi Kom<*tunoH


fhrc

Gal

i^^crui^^ Muuifwlt

hunffWt 1< Cor*

The

ywri, AHMOinani

oa^*

SJ.

*A
I

**!

Connor;

/utvt (/hett

to^u: the ablnti vo ;


Ixxiii. 27.

in r<*|fimit IIOH

pronominal

^/^

-jtocru

an,

dt^noto othor carniH, OHpcoially

affix

it*

xn'.

the socond of two

fc*roo

of an adjective, the
than to the

th

///y

xx. 3

as,

When

appended

UK, w** ? oc*> 1^&*

to

to it tathc*r

^m/^

^/^/,y

hoUnm>i&*

yl?aef f/up M<?

oUy qfthy

STTNTAX OF PRONOUNS.

exceptions to this rule

as,

me,

^Zo^ not my

prayers, but prayers offered

Exodus

see also

Isaiah. Ivi. 7;

xxi. 2

are found;

used passively in some instances

affixes are
**

see Mattli. Y.

Lukexxii. 50.

29, 30, 39;

The

Some few

thy holy city, Dan. ix, 24.

holiness, i.e.

Bar Hob. 218.

A peculiarity of the

ivp

to

xxi. 20; Isaiah

14.

Syriac language

with in the redundant use of

its

is

to be

pronouns

met

in such

cases as,

when they

1. Affixes

are placed before Dolath

of the genitive; at least they are of no use

when

translated

ci^o*

<*>ot*>

the

i.e.

lit.

our language;

into

the fame of him

fame of

Jesus,

who

lljoicjw
X

is

as,

Jesus,
the

cnZp

daughter ofSerodias.
2.

The

affix of the verb,

when the noun to which

refers is placed after it; as, <nncod

it

oiA*5
f

i.e.

and he

and he

sent, out

sent,

it

cmd cut

off

(I mew]

>t*

his head,

off his head. Mattli.

Often the noun has a particle prexiv. 10,


fixed to it as, V*\^ ov^o* lit. he took him
;

(I mean) the child,


Matth, ii. 14.
8.

When

the affix

ritnilar

it,

is

he took tlw child,

annexed to a preposition, a

construction

the hour,

i.e.

i.e.

is

in

observed; as, }ft^A


tlte

how.

00

Sometimes

SYNTAX OP

148

tho preposition

PTIONOTTNS*

redundant as well as the

is

affix; as,

Jtools ^j <o<?o fat in

Matih.

iii.

yii cc
*

]*+*&>

at

C7/m /j
(

with

i.o.

Me

him, with

icilU

Chmt, Horn.

vi.

days,

^xy^o
*

**

i\

&from ffaw,

^Acn

The pronoun cm
^ii

lip^

oep

sv. 17,

Tin*

or

o<n in

to

JFW/A

oai ZCXD^I ^>

(u!&o

irho?

is

0,

i.

such instances as
Idly, Matth.

tftc

/^////,

i.

21

viii.

28.

2 Cor.

7 w/;w/^ John

pronoun ccnor om whe.a

the ptvcrdinf; word,


jftK,

Tim.

]ZoiikJo fy

cot

^c^c

couloaeos with

it

Notnotirnon redundant;

mranK not only iolio hf hut offcon only


iliiiilu

H(*o

Also cui

7.

iii.

?/^.

*'*

coi^ to Ihw,

M((^ ifatth* xii. 7.

The

iii.

prouoinift

frequently

AKwmftTi, Biblioth. Orient.

ftmtitl in

Tom*

is

p. 2!)*%

//^*

Tnum 5 and

lihN*t!l/M\& tlw

Sets

0.

*//w tho Syrians

have not, hut (hoy nro oxprrwHed by n

circum-

little

locution; UH,
1,

By

a repetition of Iho pcrnonal pronoun with


v

the purtiolo

placed botwemi; as,

Hob.
U,

By tho
juxtaposition of tho pronouns o#
*
*
t

IIH,

Zogt

iZcu

By

V>

llrfft*

wwir /A<* Mtihtth,


'fl.

x>

001 ocno /^/c/ /7/^/

John

6m ;

ft

v,

/wv?

(Zr/y

f),

with an artlx; aw,

"In tho month

SYOTAX OP PBONOUNS.
of June

of the same

oiX*>

jAxt?

Mich. Chrest. p. 69, "Bishop

4.

?
lAi^
X
""

of the same city" Assem. T. L p. 28.


By the composition of the personal and deOf

*>,

monstrative pronouns ;
e

ffo

and V 01

as, 001
o

**<*
*

and

001 lie himself


Ijoi &c. ; as, |^0 t= H
when he came, Bar Heb. p. 508, line 14;

Matth.

If* M>oi the same,

See

46.

v.

25,

p. 61,"
5.

By an

affix

in his day,

6.

put to a noun

i.e.

A*&

oiiccua

in the self-same day he died,

Bar Eeb.

p. 278, line 10.

By

spirit

}-lo5

as,

ou.o>

as,

poip destroyed

himself, Sirach II. 22; by ]L> essence; as,

-u>u

Cant.

thyself,

* K

person;

as,

oisc^p

^^ ^o^

T. I. p. 485.

The

prefix of a particle to

served;

as,

8 ; by lao,^

a&+>9 ^o he whose
X

An

affix

Assem.

himself,

is

frequently ob-

it is,

Gen.

Sometimes a preposition is found before it ;

from mwe, John

Trpoawrov

xlix. 10.

as,

-^j

x. 14.

annexed to the word ^*>

employed as a possessive pronoun

is

frequently

28),

when

the

sentence would bo rather ambiguously expressed by

placing the affix to the

noun or the verb;

as,

thine is ike Tcwgdom, Matth. vi. 18

SYNTAX OF PIIONOTOR.
I

to 7ti#
*

MM

John

;wf,

i.

oiw> and

///

Thoso possessive pro-

11.

also to give a particular

nouns NOVVO

onorgy* to the
*^+)
than
word to which they belong;
]!DJ w//y M;?.0,

John

vii.

S; 1his

liktnviso

is

carnally Urn

IH

ndd(l to Iho noun;

John

v, Vi

^? yi^a

nsj

whon Iho

Jolni

X.

/////

iv*

3k

affix

*J^>

i^is&o

tm
tti

<*aso

^', Luke

my

vi. -12;

pronoun is in sowo ins(nn<*<'H found Imforo tlio


noun to which il rofiTs, mid
phiotul at a considori

from

aw
v.

it;

UIUH, i**^

///#

it*

//w///

cn>c^L=>

ife

woutthtitt, PH. ixxxviu 1>

Kui'h <*oimtntciion (xiHt

Jl.

^mikD|^

principally in

tlm vcTMioti of tlio Old Tcwtnmcnt, and on Uiat account

may pcrhajm

Oa
the

b<*

rcfrar<lod

pronmm WIIWH

ratitd

from

it

by KO

of more flmtralu

employed;
fa

^*

In

mfrnly as a Hebraism.
arcmot with whoro

tho othnr hand, oxaniploK

Hyritttt

with

aftta* tlu^

Ion;;

sopa^

interval, that for the sake

who

tmiwlfttMuts frrui tlu


tu

is

tlt

vw. Cyrus

(Ui tiHlx in lint

ant<H^dcmt, but

noun itwlf ought to have


JAoiw
Iwaiah xlv% 13, <Zv*sl

HjK*<*ch

as,

an

montionodiavorsol*

is

Umk>

inMiriclmKl

newrdin^ to

giving utiy oHjxxjijil cnotgy

word to wliirit it lutftu#t ; but only K tw'mx a Htrinior rondorr


HiiH nnnurk oftho (liwimfhcHint'k
iu^rf
jw^wvwivf, Umm, % 1'Ji!.
jrnmhnt (inimiuurian nwtH on no ottHuin
lt

tli

SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.
Pronouns sometimes do not

which

is

151

relate to

nearest, hut to one going hefore

the

noun

and perhaps

separated from them by a long interval; as Psalm


xliv. 3, ^oj| Asuo |y^vV Ipc] y^i thy hand hath
destroyed the people; but thou hastplmted them (not
the people, hut the fathers in verse 2).

On

the other hand, the

noun

itself is

sometimes

repeated, instead of using a pronoun; as, Gen. xvi. 16,


Abrcvni

was

IsJmael

to

eighty-six years old

Abram

The Syriac

when Eagar bore

yopjl.

writers occasionally indulge in a change

of the person of the pronoun; especially, from the


2nd. to the 3rd, pers. and vice versa; as, Luke xiii 34,

Jerusalem,

Jerusalem,

^*L*p

&^Jo

jlzj

ftL^io

*
.V
ch^o^ ^M*Si> thou slaying the prophets and stoning
those who are sent to it (to thee). See also Gal. iv. 21;
07

Horn.

ii.

and numb,

This kind of enallage hoth in pers.


frequently noticed in Hehrew, especially

&c.

1,

is

Hehrow Psalms.

in the

Those nouns which have only the plural number


sometimes use .pronouns in the sing, numb* and
sometimes in the plu.

oiL^D

<-i |la*ai> ]^JL

as,

and

Luke

sxiii. 45, t^a]

^^]o

the veil (faces) of the door

of the tewple was rent from the middle of it; but in

John
and

i.

4,

the life

we have a
is.

plural

pronoun <o<n*M |lo

The dual noun ^>$& Egypt, admits

Collective
See Hob. xi. 26.
pronoun.
a plur.
a
of
multitude
take
men,
nouns, signifying

sing,

SVXTAX OF

1R2

IMIOXOI/XS.

pronoun ; as, Ifcii* Hoi). 121. 15, oi


*A3*o /// /t't/ {iicity hi* fatuity funltfiiU

niaso.

*i

^QJ|

An

inlciTotfalivu is

tliem wj;.

somotinws promlcd by a noun


v
y

^ Zp
r

in ilw,

cotiKtruHivc

of whwn

let*

HHW

tn*t

cujuivalont to

is

it,

Doluth

(tnd

Htnfc

fc

as, *-.AJ]

<icn. XKIV,

///f

noun

//r/y/^

of whom

have

pronouns are usually expivswd by

>

H>

words; or by

ry

**oi

rtitaii,

Multlu xix.

a,

^///r?A

Mullh, xxv.

o<w

pi*.>

w;

Eplios.
*

1*

Matth, H.

prrsscd Iy
jtulywti Itoni.

put

oblique*

ii,

cno

op^

(J;

thaiixuw

CTUA

Mtule,

14;

i.

prdixod to a

^aam^

^Aa

001?

wmt/6'.

M/W

UJP
^/v,

as,

C^ lo

mutt,

Acts xxv,

who

2*t,

IB indicutted,

nth a personal pronoun

/////, cru
'

1.

oj

of the. relative Dobith


tlto. I )ul

jHtmoiiH arc

tf

as, <J>>

C*
!

ywufc*]?

byooiuwcling with
in

who

M.
i

Ut

pro-

pronoun and

pronouns of tlm Iwtaiul 2nd


v
V

An

>

inakon u relative; as, **0vaAfi

pcmmui pronoun

personal pronouns with

a rotalivr;

Zv*]

wlwslwll

!nitni)}{iiiivo

Hoiui'liai^s tin*

2fi).

us,

xii. 1M.

ftx(d

is

Iho inl<'rn)gat.ivc;

to

]>n*lix<*d
^#

!',

which

or,

2**$;

sialo of the

di

fli*'

//^ daitgli-

to /rfAw//, ^OJ0wt /o

SYNTAX OP PRONOUNS.
in

>

whom, r

to

* ......

thee,

whom,

me,

whom.

to

>

to

153

...... >

By an

jJnd.

oblique pronominal affix to the verb and Dolath

"I am Joseph your brother


Gen. xlv.

3rd.

an

By

as,

sold.

the noun

>,

in whose
o\^p>
X

as,

hand.

H^Ul* l^co-a <pcro


was bomd. Bar Hob. p. 611,

The

a noun and

also a preposition prefixed

having

whom ye

i-ojoai3i>

affix to

to

accus. of > is sometimes

which he

in the days in

19.

marked by

this letter

alone, without any connection with a pars, pronoun ;


as,
V

^=>v*

>ojl

1^

pihj

^D

man whom He had formed,

all things,

which

He

Other oblique cases of the


pressed

The

t)y

thus ;

8;

had made, Gon.

rel.

i.

31.

a*o occasionally ex-

alone.

>

relative
*

(Jen. ii

pronoun

001,

forms

CFIS9 001

oblique cases

its

'

in whom, masc. &o.

We have also oo^ u*oi

in whom, fern. Asseman. T. III. p. 374.

The oblique

cases of the relative

expressed by an affix following;


sto brought up.

Tho oblique
and.

|!*j

Bar Heb.

pronoun

as,

<nh*3hm

oiii

]iojl

whom

cases of the relative pronouns

arc formod cither

he

ooTj

wlw hath

are

p. 297.

by an

ears,

Matth.

>

^D

affix following, or

by prepositions prefixed or separate


jf!

> ooij

xi.

frp wtom TM wisfod," Bar Hob.


hmi wJwm, II). p. 216.

15
p.

Mj* r*

as,

"
;

850

He
j

slow

15

SYNTAX 0V

The pronoun

fcMfa*lsp </tf/J 7/0 re/to

relative

Bar

17

xi.

Luko

nffwiwf Hwlft

as

flfiaJM lr

ns,

ii,

2to*^o

17

//^/rf

//////

tthttll

hig or
aw,

(Icn.

////>//

/^

f/wtt

fro;v/ M/////, IH

So

atoo

lii^
eartttte

Hftjf

{Ijio

the

0/w ;

to you,)
i

wtlihi her*

^i

as,

|Iosj

^m

aro

^J]

Matth, xxiv.

Hlgnillocl

<]

23.

by

}D]

The word

Limit

Soo Exod. xviil 26.

Reo Matth, xx. 20;

tuiy thing*

wouwut Mark

rt

Wo havo nlfto ^
l.o.

fo

vii.

toother

joined

or t&o only

itself,

\Vc havo U!KO fl ^ o^tote one; as,


^rfr// <?//^, Ijuko x, 38 ; IH U'M

ttfllw d(ty#9

iLf.

by ]aS

litttfflHitl

likewise ihuw used

y>jio

Lovit. v. 2,

<7.

fur

>

as,

occasionally

8<wik

ttHfft bluff

H;

xviii.

for

olaa ^JL agawat

^nf>l(yf'rt to pxprrgft w/jy

//

put

]L]o

as,

The wordn *ul and lial

&>tft (Irn. xviii, 12,

is

28) arc expressed by

wrtMftnHM

feccoo

by

Hoi)

in

Hol>. 487. 1.

pronoun*; (see

with the affixes;

Luke

where |L]

/,v <//;//',

Sots also 1>8. xxxii.

iivtf

occasionally omitted, but not so

is

ilio

**w

frequently

>

1>JIONOTJNS.

25,
in

^
this

and

sonso;

r^/y^/^ /7n^ Aw&cm. 1\

tl itRod thus

OT

ff

j&co*

*-4ij

thus,

I. p.

^^

arc

83.

f^ one

r%, Bar Hob, p, 127 ^


the same way ; as, t*mo*1

nyfftoto

cm]>!oy(ul in

a wrfatu ant ofkb bwlhtwit Bur Hob. p 107.

SYNTAX OF VEKBS.

155

some of the branches, the Syriac translation


K\dSa>v. Horn. xi. 17. Also
there are those
^f^ )*

who

say,

another

i.

certain say, Assem. T. I. p. 10.

e.

mode

7
.

Some ....
*l

other

the

by

^-ii) in

repeated, see Assem. T. II. p. 304; or Jby

member and

following members.

faf*]

We

that.

haye also

See Matth.

56.

and person

Mary

with

as,

anointed,

***

w<zs

^,

^ **

Syntax of Verbs.

its

itt Subject*

subject in gender, number,

U1 ^QA* Jesus came,

*SQ.\Z

o^]^ the

Nouns which are used only

7*m

xii.

t^=>>

-*I^s whosoever

>

disciples ashed.

in the

receive a verb cither in the sing, or plu.


in

&c.

Agreement of the Verb with

A verb agrees

77* John
77)
or

*"

xii. 50,

by

in the latter; or

See Matth. xvi. 14


*

*
V
^=> 3 ^M^D,
and their femininos for each one.

___

or

m0

^
12.

-*j]

the former member, and

in the latter, see Assem. T. II. p. 366

in the former

left,

mcu*)3

as,

r^&J ^+

as,

his trespasses," Matth. xviii. 35.

otf/ae?*

others

***

and

jao 002-0 ^aZZ #0 taken


Matth. xxiy. 40 ; by *^j| and
#/*<?

t~o

i-osZuj

o?a0 #o

is

of expressing the Latin quidam.

One .... the other by

6e

This

John L 4

plural
;

number

as, |ooi

will

VMA ^ia
A

HVNTAX
and t/w
is

life is

///<*

tiff

wen 9 same

hi of

gnumnutii'ally teriwd mnxtrurfifi ad

ciHtstrwlw ml forwam,
to

tlie

Several

Tho former

place.

senwm, and the

other

much

the

saino

latter

exceptions are fouud

Amoral ruls which, although not

fiwvgcmig

of
qut'nt, arc
in

VEKBS.

03?

so

fro-

character as those which exist

WIuw

put in tlu

Collcriivu nouiiH
lion,

nw , on uwount

also

KtMi

with

o^ ..^iL]

////,

|Ll tiHottwr army

ltJl.2.

!l;

Aswimu
*

tlicir signiiica-

plural; as, &-1 <n^nj y in Bar

ifi<

*
"'

J 5,

of

fc

100. 1H,

Cliroit.

together, the verb belong-

phu uuinb. nuisc, gender.

vrh

joined to a

Jicl).

come

Hruirul sulMinntivcK

them

ing to

oocn w*ito>

%o

JJibl.

Orion.

f//;wi

aU wAa

In Ihiw manner of (ronntruistiou \vo

tu<\

iind

dcnolin^ hut

ntuwl for a

wmtHimtw u nouniii

\V<t have*

nuuiyoiluTS*

oti

cl'ass,

in<lividuul,

and yet being made

he verb

put. in

is

to

tho plu. nuiab.

Jet*, xxviii. 1.

verb*

when

in#, in

domuUmroi joined with a

tho verb pr^fcdcH, oBpeciutly


c /^^/
/'/A

r/

Mutth,

1IL

0/vwrt/

/////o

10> ^.^..* tfuS

A/M

Bar Hob. (Jimm,

7*

noun

&A;

as,

*o/^ ; ota ]om

u|

attd

7 /^c* porches, John


^iLazf Mtf

Cfp i^aw

Uk

^^

plur.

Aeww

v. 2.
?c^(?

/Af fuffiliw* fall upon*

SYNTAX OF VEEBS.

A verb
noun,

157
with a plur.

sing, is also occasionally joined

when

the verb follows

were, Bar Heb.


Bar Heb. p. 16.

p. 581. 8

as, ]ooi

]teou the days

\^

Me elders ruled.

pj

example, and others in


illustration both of this and the last paragraph, tho
plur.

verb

In

this

may be intended. The o or ^ at the end of tho


may have been omitted, as wo know that not

unfrequently
Verbs,

number.
fern.,

8.

it is.

and pronouns have no dual


Henoo the numerals ^L maso. and ,-*2*z

adjectives

with the noun which thoy qualify are joined to

a plur. verb ; as, <po<?u ^vz two shall be] Matth.


xxiv. 40.
See also Matth. xix. 5, and Luko xvii.
35, 36.

Collective

nouns of the

fern.

gend. are often found

with plu. verbs of the masc, gond. but this diversity


of gend. may bo required
by the sense; as, jLf oiSa
;

<*

earth, is

put for people of the earth; similarly, Gen.

xli. 57, olf

jLl

o&>

people of the earth.

all the earth


]l**l] is

cwne,

i.e.

thus constructed

The proper names

Heb, Ohron. 148. 16.


for the

M
p

<-co all the earth weep, 2 Sam. xv. 23, where

all fh,e
in.

Bar

of places are

same reason sometimes connected with verbs

and pronouns of tho

plu. masc.

There are many examples collected by Hoffman


and AgroU of a difference in gender between the
subject and predicate

as, *}'&&]

oai*4

occasion was

SVNTAX OF

Bar

Hoi). p. 012, It,

(wo
,

/cy/

HiMtittuul

MM/*

p.

/JwVf/f/W, ib. p, TOO, It,

"When a substantive
diverttity of i^*n<kr

verb, adjective

is

of

coimnon fjonder a
wmi(Jim<'< found between the
is

and pronoun

tli

in

ronncdiornvith

it; as,

shall be
ii.

Am. cf&Z and


"\Vluti

1; wlnu-0

IL

(ho

maw.

\vo

hav jowiod

ufltx oil.

iioutiH conuj

itmiiy

th* oonjiiurtiuu o,

(\\i\

iogothcr connceied l>y


vcrh Ixdon^in^ to tliosc nouns
K

in

j)iU.

iu tlu

wk&l
xvii* 10.

cially

<nul

Jfwtfi

nn

/iicrf

put

his

ns,

us, *-ujdioo

Jbuiul,

1|^&J

when

P llicojo

and

viii.
;

22,

espe-

^M^>^O

Oou,

nutewtlt

*pwr iwiv w/ w^i Jud.

AVhoti Uio nouiiH

8eo Oen.

!J

lirnt

MM

cxtu'ption

i'ollowH tltc subject

xiil.

^Q\{i

arc uxwptionB to this rule

vt^rb is

find

*'

1^]^

Jtintwt <tuU Jolm

////(/

///X Aliu-k

Them

whuwtlu*

OecaHiostully

an,

|jlnr. )iiinil)t'r;

o<u&*o

^utOaO ,7V/fV,

Ex*

to {IsJ the

viu

7.

the verb

iLffl

^//t6

v* H.

mining together n numtionod

in

UM* biNt pftrngmph dilHr iu fpmdttr, the {j<ndot of the


vorb

u(fmH with that 1o which it to noureist


Miriam mid Aaron

as,

SYNTAX OP VERBS.

Numb.

xii. 1.

159

toiujj |taS,ao ]$&*>]> justice

and peace

shall kiss each other, Ps. Ixxxv. 11.

The 3rd, pers.

of verbs sometimes admits an

as to gender; as, |2uf*&o oooi there

Eeb, Chron. 324 6

see

Mark

anomaly
were camps, Bar

xiii.

and many

21,

other places.

The

3rd. pers. sing. both, of the masc.

and

fern.

gender, in passive as well as in active conjugations, is

sometimes used impersonally


be evil to you, Jer. vii. 6

Deut.

vi.

24

Ll\ it
it

The
is

-KJU^D

it

Syriac has

as,

thee,

me a

<oa^ *+]sj

^ ^\&A
happened

came upon

shall be to

was good

it

to him,

Job.

it will

iv.

Luke
;

to us,
i.

U^

9.

looiZ

testimony, Gen. xxi. 30.

Honce the

no neuter gender.

fern.

used in nouns, adjectives, pronouns and verbs,

where a neuter would be employed in languages


possessing this gender

as,

^^x ll&-^ ^o*a

l?oi

happened on the third day, Bph. Tom. I. p. 220.


See Kirsch. Chres. 219. 6; 220. 1. There axe, how-

this

ever, several exceptions to this rule


'if it

low ]*aata

as,

be possible, Kirsch. .Chres. p. 509.

the masc. gender

When two

is

1.

used.

nouns come together, the

latter being

ruled by the former, the verb occasionally agrees


*
w
90

gender and number with the latter ;

as,

P^LcJ the number of the slam went up.


p, 552.

<]

10, where

in.
7

\i*o *&*&
Bar Heb..

SYNTAX OF

!(><>

VEttJBS.

ttwa of the

the

lictiulcft

the

past,

7Vw',

is

prcrtovito

occasionally

to express other times,

employed
Events of

fut urn

occurrence, \\hioh arc considered

as oortain to happen, have this certainty represented

by the verb

boinj? placed in tlu

ttitfltiff

ix.2

w/v/) ///vw/ %/// Isainli,

]-Cc

hM
life,

It

J^

atbh

Ul

///'

comefh nut

*/f

^L^

fl

P]

to

con*

/;/// fl//f///

/ww

(A/^///

iMMint) ffMii

(Iwrlfi to

Uk

v.

found,

IH

ov* W/^7/

John

pwtoritrs tcnso; as,

py l>mw

tltirktitw

!)t

an

may bo

pnra^rapli, that tin

cxprm

\o

iiift*wcl

front tlio

pwloritft

as

Cut.

prophof'u?

pro-

in

in

On thi point it may bo wi*H to quoto tho following


remark of Jlolfmwi
jttwMbM/M 'hi rcwfaMi V* T.
:

/ft I iff

vV

jtwl*

wl

ww.

ttnmi!ttOii

in ftueh
to

hypothetical

tlmt

tlift

tiling

wntonws

IM
///

in

^MTI

^H^CO

trnttbtn

tmd

tknw

80.

3!BJ.

in ivhldi

it in

tho natural form

^ooiJbbd

'Dinii. iv.

]).

Kpokonofwill mmotopasfl:

<mmi thowfim*, tho pmt.

employ

COMMW

JMtftthim

Ornm.

v//i/w.

arc

fut.

twin: ntomH>

till

<a

thinyit

httw

161

SYNTAX OP VERBS.

We find the prat,

of the substantive verb followed

verb not unfrequently


participle of another

by the

denoting the present of the conjunctive


require from

you ^S}3

them." 1 Thess. v. 12.

^^
"I

{ob+ooiy that

will

^^o

as,

"

wo

ye vnay know

oooJ that they

often
pray." 1 Tim. ii. 8. In general the prset. is not
met with to give to a sentence a subjunctive or conthe fut.,
junctive character. That is usually done by

sometimes assisted and sometimes not by particles


accompanying ita as will be found stated more fully
in the section

which

follows.

There are a few instances in which tho


of the verb

]ooi,

followed

by a

adjective, represents the imperative

t^L

2uooi liaoi

*pia>terite

participle or
;

as,

Juf

^>]

an

^1

go thou also (and) do the same, Luke x.

This application of the tense is undoubtedly to


give emphasis to the sentence. Por as a pra&terito is
37.

employed to express our

belief that

some future event

will certainly take place, so is it readily seen that

on

the same principle this tense may be regarded as


the emphatic form of the imperative, whenever it is
so applied.

The

prseterite
7

perfect

as,

done, Gen.

ii*

has sometimes the force of the pluV


V

y=&j
2.

-*opi! his worfo, which

Again, in

iii.

1,

wo

ho had
" And the
have,

serpent was the most subtile of the animal*


the

Lord had made, \1(& t=^?V*

102

SYNTAX

In Syrino, as

llelivew, the pnetorilo

in

instances used,

where

sent

ns, l&t*

*\vo

in

some

should employ tho

pre-

am

tuotr,

to

resolved

this

tJwtt

tn*t

r//V/j/wW,
f

*^n.
i

employed

IX
in

i\

exviifp

in

IN, L

1,

ji

Luke

pra'tcrito

^w//

ir//f

^
w

&a^|
It is likewise

whi'h the truths enunciated

dependent on time ; aa,


the nmn who wtlk* not (halli not

in

all

>

tho eoanscl of the widcod."

in

lilcc-

vkhou condition and Mtatc

(Ueb. exix,) 28.

aeuteweH

as com-

know and

knowledge,

0; u*Ay

are j^iiewl, niul not at

" Hh^ssed

are implied; an, yla] *-ODZ| liii^o

why

is

Iwoirn,

Tho

I.

.vi.

linus

wiwMlonoirH pwHPiit

Jut re

decision

on

art

Sec also John

't,

lit.

prehending eertainty imd

xvi.

VERBS,

OJ?

In-

the preterite, in tho lant example (evidently oxtho nenthnent eontjiined in it with more
accuracy, iHH'luisc with
;

for
ee,

mem*

tfenerality,

than tho

we mny HuppoKetiicbleHKedneKBtohctho
not wo

of Uto wicked at

mueh of not walking in tho counsel

some

particular irtntant of time, as of

not having walked, or of not having Itfum In tho habit


of walking, at any ono period of life-

Tho

pnoterito

thetical sentence*,

frequently

^001

tied for tho imperfect in hypo-

in

although tho future

mot with

in such cages

we should haw been

like

na,

IH

much more

<+am >oop

unto tiodom, Isaiah I

j|

9.

In a eoitditional sentence the pluperfect is likewise indi*

163

SYNTAX OF VERBS.

by the preterite form ;


and except the Lord had left

oated

>

as,

w,

to

jo

Isaiah

9,

i.

Use of the Future*

The future
present

as,

>u

<QJ|

It^l?

l~ffl>'Q2

See also Isaiah

The future

Tltii.

Judg.

thing,

Ut*

as,

v.

louSL

God
|=L^

and spear were not seen,


in my place, Hab. ii. 1 ;

forth

the

from

prseterite

is

8.

ib.

i>

prat in

hath chosen

8; |>*2u P l-So5o
*

i.

ii.

17.

also occupies the place of the

a few instances

thee, Jer.

he caitseth them

giveththem) thrones ofglory, 1 Sam.

to inherit (or

anew

occasionally found in the place of the

is

|SLJD

^I

sword

>OQS] *>taoj

stood

P^ S^/br^ fAa^ Iformed


lls^ ^i ^oai p^ S^/b^ thou earnest
womb,

indicated

^Jojl

In the two

ib.

by

last places

the

the particles connected with

the respective verbs.

almost always used when the verb implies something conditional or potential; and this is
done sometimes with and sometimes without any ac-

The

fut. is

companying

Hence

particles.

it

includes all those


x

forms of speaking, where in English we use one of the


auxiliary verbs, may, can,

t&jud
X

vii.

may
;

let,

would, &c.

the evil (of the wicked)

V^W>

come

to

as,

<**&J U^QSOTZ niay the life of the child


my

return, 1

*4XJ

an end9 Ps.

Kings xvii. 21

<

w^tujsu he would deliver hits*

TS2

SYNTAX OK
H.

xxil 9

VEttBK.

yioo*u let them &hew Miw, Fsaiali xix* 12

oU ^ji (firm
A prohibition in fiyriac, as

wmjwt freely ct, Gen. il 1C.

by iho future
Lo.

wll wf,

nol

kill,

i*e. cfo

(Jon.

e,
.

20;

n,

^^0

rtn/

^ayio
in

tlio

fut.

p>

//i

wo

/A"/ *^

|5*

tlutt

/**y

ttlo found

tltt/ttfipy

they tuny

although (yo

Is

may

him

ffrant to

nol hearken^

ffivos this force

know

Bssok. xx.

viii 8.

yp^ ^4^

accompany

W, %-Liifl^u^

^j

tta<

ay) to thi* mountain

4.
as,

<%

that it be

Tho imperfect conjuncoften formed by moons of the fut, and the


*&!* $i\**4*o that
verb Jo*; n, oow

rwnoccd, Matthew
tire

%W,

5<?

VHf---^l^

tf;

tthnil

there

thw> Qon. xxvii,

Other imrtictoi in notno luBtanoem

itoW/^

///^^

nH follows j

my mid wiy M<w

w/^/

when

way Mwijlw* Exod*

lifwuic'fl >

Bar Hob. Chron. WJO.

Tlio

20.

i.

often connected

would

Tlw* prefix o ftotwi'nwm

xi, 7,
visrfo

Euth

polontial Hignifloation is in-

K>; yoVAJ?

ii.

by

and

a, <*& ^ij ^1?

l>n,

to the

whim a

ful.

>

ttow shall

-aju^o2 p </MMI

ww,

]tow Ion4

AH,

Tin* partwloH

8*

!.

^o^cl p

,0tf

w/

dof

3;

invariably

p lAou s/^

xlvi.

no prohibition;

with iho

V*>I

Excxl xx, 13

somotimoR

in

as,

is

llchrow,

Con.

rfr;

till, or,

impor.

w/
ml

/tfr

in

were not able,

xxi, 21*

Mark
Atf

ill

20} lo*

wwrity qf

the

yal^Zu?

V^>

dtp might 1$

165

SYNTAX OF VERBS.
Assem. Bibl. Orien.

established,

we have the

Arab,

393.

i.

and imperf. formed

pluperfect

*-

by putting the

<*

tot*"

written; L--*&

J& he was

64

future

phrasis.

Ss>

\^3$

participle

and the

-*

See

writing,

often expressed in the

is

as,

**

Arab. Gram. p.

the
J6 before
*

prseterite of the verb

prat, and future of another verb


f

So in

2.

fut.

Stewart's

way

of peri-

of the yerb

sometimes come together having the force of the


?
*
*

^r^o

as,

p. 347.

^ooou

^^cn

l&^a

Departure of

forth.

shall

they

1.

^ofri <ooou these words shall go

my Lady Mary from ttia

world,

3,

^^

times joined to a verb in the infin. with

two ezpress jointly the future tense ;

we

]ooi

fut.

Assem. T. III.

send,

by Dr. W. Wright.
The word
similarly to the Greek /*Ax

p. ,j.

had

Tie

shall

literally,

stand; perhaps

we are about

ice

shall

to stand,

Schaaf s Lexicon under t*Ax

as,

is
,

some-

and the

>onSnS

^r

Zii,

Z X

shortly

stmd ;
See

Horn. xiv. 10.

Sometimes the future

of the verb following is found instead of the

and occasionally without it, as, H


So says Agrell; Supp. p. 21.
glorify*

with the prefix

77*'

^*aAi> shall

But

it

the

inftn.

seems to

rendered,

is

me

'

that c*=ljj has rather the force of

The expression consequently should be


about to glorify, where the idea of inci-

pient future time

"We have a

fut.

is

contained in t*j^.

with

John xxl

19*

prefixed in such'a construc-

tion as the following; as,

SYNTAX
ilatth.

when
xvi. 8

ii.

01?

whore wo

22,

VEftBS.

KCO the

in EntfliKh

wo

should

Murk

15,

(?

i.

fut. is

uso the

Luke

iuf.

employed,
See ib,

11

xiii.

i Cor.

ii.

fttflnUire.

An

oonwvtcd with a finite verb adds


or drnotw wlial is
si^n if ted by tho verb

infinitive

intensity io

it,

to 1)0 wrftfiti, Ji.ml <r

WHthnwl

as,

1^] ol^ai J

ir!tlffwn/lff Mut/i/dy, (J( n. xxii,

UH/ */w///

w//^//

/A-

nwHwMy

fitvw

WlH'ti

nifvin^
flxcnl

/A//

rito

A'M

amo

'

f*^
IjfiUA
//,

to

xiv.

f<wl tuning Luke

v^l Iw wmketl

^o

wrh

the

/<?</*

fa

or

)c
* *

'

Iho

Ja

iitr.

\vith

iKu-ticiplt*; UH,

ttltty

xn

15

him, Matth,

?
.

nuty be rendered

ojv^

|t^^

]OCDO

when

it in

wtthtff) (Jon, xv. 12,

n^inu'k

us
employed
*
V
C'

to

/w/ f John

///f

EngUnh by ilw

flt//^/

t?(vtrnod by some verb aig.


WMunnnti it IMS generally VN pre-

5,

AIW
in

^ i^ hath

|on

Hi, 1,

is

wttt him

<;'

Jem

17; ^oZa^z zciio p

iii, 4,;

po| ^-xi

v*

A; /v/wn

xiv

cir

/w/r,y,

//vV/,
ftH,

thyiMwl, (inL

iiiHnithc

ntt

(Urn.

r//V B

in

is

applied) lo to

lu

**V-

cruLCo flr.BCila.\

faMnfffim

it,

&A

tho preceding example:


*
t

Px elr,

as,

jr

&A ^maJ^
k

iii.

///?

14,

& #01 adding

SYNTAX OE VEBBS.

167

It is not unusual for the infinitive to be found in

connection with other particles besides the Lomad


prefixed to it, giving to the said infinitive a participial
effect

as,

lio^? ^c ots

jZUfo

btiildwg the city, Gen. xi. 8.

he hath not ceased

ceased

they

oNJsaNj

from praying, Assem.

focn

from
jli

j]

T. I. p. 36.

Use of the Imperative.

The imperative

is

not only employed to express

a command^ but also an exhortation, admonition or


permission;

John

as,

xi, 15,

^c^ oa^ci g&%e hither.


JH

See also

Mark i.

The imper.

38.

of the verb |) is frequently found in

connection with a finite verb in the fut. tense

yucj

lfi!o

covenant,

now come, we will make a


and now come, let
make a covenant,

Gen. xxxi. 44; ^fa


X

We

thus,

md

\L V*cno

i.e.

o2 come, we will go, John

xi. 7.

have also the imper. in such constructions as

the following 3

lW?

Egypt*

I will gweyou

h<e

best

*icA o^oslo and eat ye

of the fandof

(i.e.

ye shall eat

fat of the land, Gen. xlv. 18 oLo op^


this do, md live, Le. (this do, and ye shall Iwe,) Gen.
of) the

xlii.

)joi

',

18.

An imperative

is

occasionally found in connection

with a participle;

as,

Mark

may

iv.'

39,

It

Z\j]

f^ ^^4 cease,

be that

*J^

be th<w still,

the imper. in-

108

SYNTAX Ol

word which

fluoneos the

Vl'JKBS.

follows,

and renders the ex-

profuuon of tho Hiibstnntive verb unnecessary,

it
being
a
used
with
ordinarily
participle when an imper. is

In uttering a command it is natural not


to UHO mow words than arc
necessary. The same

intended,

construction
T.

f.

p.

The

cxsn

Assem.

in

is

|Kirtici|>lr

Uwelcss,

<->.

O9t

lias

if

no Ihno of

of every (hmuvith which


|Kirlnk*H

bo connrdtsl Thus, pirn must


an.

M<r.<i>,ff

1-*^*^

^^u^Ccs 001

^.Aljo

|icn

of HIM

//// vibick Kht'lt IM torn

f^

(ien. xvii.

y^iul

l&c*/tf<M

when tlwy aw*


ti'nw

tint

fto

trtuuterlttff

jmdidi

c&!?
4*1*

thing

ion

p
/WM

UM,
find a

a,

hwiM

|>^ ho

BUM,
j

an

or tkc pr<

^oi^

!-.;

r/wr/ rf/wrf,

l-k<

(tof.

saw

Thewfom
*
Luke

i.

JJ5

6m/* to Ihcc

(/,

J uclgoM, iil 25* Parti-

Hitcli^

(ix

to

and not

them
;

HH,

hou^

)I1,

for the

for the

most

UD ^pl^o
1 Tim.

Jrtti sitting,

& p $v&

Act

holy,

ful.;

UH t JkhoUl thmr Lord,

placed before

liav

part

^//^//

/'{/r*

The- pra

1!K

in

its

may

it

Tho

frc^^tu^ntly.

i*

|p

Orient.

3Jil)L

W,

liut

own,

be

may

Mark

v.
ii.

13;

14

subject to tho same

<nJouo

<r;icJI

he

gwe

U&r

\K. 41.

parUdplA umirping aB

it

were tho

office

SYNTAX OE
of

an

inf. after

169

VEIUBS.

verbs of beginning and continuing, of

permitting and commanding, and also of power ;

POA S;-N^

plucking the ears, L

S^aw

o*f* ttgy

Matth.

to pluck,

began

<oou$z permit both of them to


o
*

John

44

xi.

(assisting)

ttai

OOOSA

]i^D oxS $i|

fo (70 (going),

command

her to assist

me, Luke x. 40;

<QJ| ^*1 w*a/| jh ^| ^o


recewe (receiving) them,

to

2.

ii.

The

^>

grow (growing), Matth.

and permit (him)

was not able

7*^

Mark

30; ^il QSOSU.O

xiii.

xii.

e.

they

as,

active participles are in

hut which are rendered

in the constructive state;


into English as if they

some instances found

were in the absolute

state.

In such cases they are followed by a noun; as,


lao ^ cA^a descending the ditch, i.e. into the ditch>
9 7
S
12

Prov.

i.

xxiii.

10

Active

which

same

1^5 Z

laoicj

i^]^

J^^

participles

follows,

enter mg

at the gate, Gen.

knowing the law, Kom.


sometimes

govern

vii. 1.

the

noun

and in the same manner and using the


from which they are.de-

as the verbs
partible

rived ; as, <n!L ]+> u-f*

lie

begem upbraiding him, Bar

^
V*7

Eeb. Chron. 328. 3 ;


vii.

loL
A

dwelling

V*C

me,

Eom.

pois IAIIHD ^ocn-i^o and destroying


men, Bar Heb. Ohron. 39 ?. 1.

17, 18, 20

all the

Similarly passive participles observe this

ment

as, l^co .4.nb. clothed

gbvem*

with linen* Ezek.

ix.

2j

SVXTAX or

170

VISILES,

ft

^o

l*Atain

Mwhited with

//WM qf WMic'ity Malth.


in

Although
KomctimcM

participle is followed

which case the two verbs in Syriac


*v
*
flamoinood, icnse, and person; aw, ^^^^
verb, in

o^

vrfKHrKtiwifiM,

Malih.

<";///////v\

J trill

ii.

S;

(him),

continual progress or decline of w hat

is

and continnally,
fftritiff

ii,

<iitt{

is wlnlotl

* f

<icn.

o^o

viii. ;i;
l.c*.

gtvwhiff*

futfH'r/wt

fttnt

in

how

Mai Ih,

JiS

ii.

',)

was

gradually
the

cfontinuully

HMW*. tfitMON uro formed.

2K 4

|cq

Ji.

20; Ltom

;<

KxnittplcK of the Vlup<*rfect


'

in

l^, MI^X

" Aurh <*huo

)om Mattlu iu.


*

In toy

^il

if&iM'iillfi', ib.

/d!, Actu xx*

J.

\t

[A^o mid

^i)

ofthc Iniprrfcct arc (ho following


/YW/,

;2<i>

TV/it

If,

ib.

Mff, i.o.

1 Smu.

denoted by the

verb in the H'lttenec; as

hnj

iropcvOwT^

jo^a] ^]f

/ /^vV/ iwxli![j

////,

by a

luivo tho

are employed to cxprcsw a gradual but

I'artieiLiles

very

books into Syriac


they
a CJm*k
par(ici]>hj by a Syriac verb,

t/f>,

is

(hwk

where the Oreel;

{fyrtiirfWi

|j

use of participles

ilio

Syriac

r<*nd( r

especially

ii,

xi. 11.

in translating

grunt, yet

Lev.

oil,

<*n|i)

<rtlut IVHchit(*, liowiivoi',

it in

/I,

SYNTAX OF VERBS.
*

]oqi

Luke
IOOT

v.

~i>^f

ie0w, ib.

fs.

oij4*]

jmLoZ /or astonishment


ooai

7a<?

iii.

ai^

had taken him,

had gone up, John

they

A0d! retired,

&ad

Zooi Zooi

v. 13;

ib.

iv.

Occasionally the prseterite has the

25.

In Matth.

force of the pluperfect.

24 we have

i.

^ ^<^ ^^ the angel of

\+f&> owfLo cnS fAS* l^Lf t=^


the

171

Lord had commanded him.

The

prsaterite,
*

however, followed by the substantive

verb Ion does not always

make

only the prseterite, or imperfect

Mark

i.

45 ;

]ocn

IOCPI

In addition to what

we

as, |ogi *+$+

p ]Lz\ the twne was not,

u|

Joel,

33 and 34,

the pluperfect \ but


he began,

ib. xi. 13.

and

is

said of these verbs in sections

The

subjoin the following remarks.

substantive verb

]o<ji

seems to be employed in some

passages for the purpose of giving emphasis to

them ;

^AS.SQSn ^pj) fs^Joai Vfor it was not ye $pea7cing,


Matth* x. 20. Hoffinan says these words may be
as,

more

by the Erench

ao6turaitely ^expressed

^^

^}

]y\*\
pas vows, qui parlent.
was not concernwff the bread I spake,
is

not unusual for lom

}J

as,

0P0

U^? *P

carpenters son? Matth.


xx. 25 ; Luke xi. 40,
looi is

pleonastic in

P^

ib. xvi.

oe

fa'est

that it
11.

It

to express a negative put

pp 7

interrogatively

IOCT

\*<n

xiii.

some

&

low P

55.

is

not this the

See also Mattiu

instances, ^e.

it is

made

SYNTAX

no

account, of in iho translation of the passage in

which

occurs

i(

/mw

M<?

I.

*l

translated bv lo^o,

IKMM

to

yaw on

(ft

ftttHft

iVwro of the

New Testament

OT o being usually prefixed to

l*^>

licul* ]ocno

tkr eighth thy that they came>

the fnilmvinur verb;


flute

0/ created with the earth,

as, oi]o

In wmio ilnct

i, 5!)*

>

ciilk ]ocn p paiio ]!&]

}ik>|5

/cm?

p- 21-

the following verb;

it

cupZj

as,

fa'/vta

rt//tf

Eplivuim T.
is

VEUBS.

01?

s n< ith(r
i

nor o

UN, **.CA* \l] ^wai


tlnwti

/>/

tfttff*

JtixiM

is

and

it

Luke

prefixed to

Itoao ICOTO
e<nw Mark

wc/
i.

9.

*-UVwT
passed over in iho Syriac vorSeo Mnith. Sx. 10; Murk
\vUliMiit un> untiee,
is

Luke

I;

iv.

rormeil

or pronoun

JSu)

ienso

of

lorn

is

tluuiflixto the

\vith

Bender and number with tho noun


\vtiielt it in coinu^icd
31.
See

\\ith

is, It<>vve\ifr,

aHer

it

plaein^

Irtllcr n^reeiiin; in

&1

The impiTfect

HI

ii,

occiiHtotuilly

round without an

affix; as,

jn+ ]$ ^t
Mutth.

cca

I*]

xxii. Si5

MM

|ccn in

lAnw were *wen

ohncrvcd in a few instances

before in^tctul of after

as, ^qioJu] |om

Bnv
ptntrn

lleb,

and

young child
ral<

dm

^cndei*

ii

j>,

{)t,

Lit itself in

ir<M,

SomotimcB

made

cxpWHH \mi

i!

to

0*

lino 7.

M at !h.

brethren,

]ooi

diRap-

tiruo; as,

A^iiin, although as -a

ImpCM'rct'fc Tcitno nffn^CH

with

its subject

in

ad number; yet toa 2u] in to bo met with in a


without any regard to tbis tkgroonumi ; as,

SYNTAX OF VERBS.
Joji Zuj

line

l2o=yX^s

was enmity, Bar Heb. 288,

there

4 ; although we have
there

ji

was a

0$

same way as

Lomad with

(see

ii.

2u|

34),

a pronominal

<A aAj ^i^


Luke

have also

how, Mark xv.

composed of P and

also

ix. 16,

25,

|ogi

mcwz-y things, 2 John, verse 12.

were

as,

John

'in

We

division.

third

#*<?

173

and when followed by

affix signifies to

who hath

7 ; John

takes the affixes in the

have not\

not, Matth. xiil 13-

iv. 17. It

Regimen of

has usually

See

prefixed.

Verbs.

A transitive verb exercises an influence over a noun


or pronoun which follows

and which

mediately,

noun
tion;

John

or

pronoun may
fO^

as,
iv.

DX^CD

1; UO^D

the riffhteous,

Mark

either immediately or

limits its

If^o^Z he made many


l*io,

x. 3;
ii.

The

signification.

he with or without a preposi-

^^os

manded you? Mark

it,

What

disciples,

has Moses com-

ja^'i^M; ^at I may

call

17.

Verbs which are doubly transitive, such as transi-

which are causative,


influence over two such nouns or pro-

tive verbs in those conjugations

exercise this

he commanded
to
l^o^ 1-loa^
be clothed with a garment" offine Imen, Gen. xli. 42 ;

nouns ;

as,

l^L^ f^v 1^ <^^V)


!

Eccles, xii. 9.

onr-i^V

him

he taught the people knowledge*

SVXTAX OF vnrs.

171-

The* passive conjiigniions of vorlw oflontimcB ex-

press ihe cause or motive of action

l>y

tho jmrtiolo

*meh manner as iho following; ^coui ^pv*zL


yc wtty hi* */vw ft// /A/'/w, Mutth. vi. 1. p^Li 001

in fcomo
t/nil

/7

{cu&

Luke

fo*

/////

^ p>*]

Ii IK noi
jutynlitMis

ft//

John

viii. il);

In the winin
\Lti

/to////

viii.

wnsu
///'

inm

Ly^o

intTi'v*
1

of tla* poal

riph

///f*

xv. 21; xviii.18.

^o

/i/>//v7 t

is

p>i|

liko

mj/mfawd

/u*

many

Mnttli,

1H.

viii.

Cr!ton*
/lw

is

wW/(r

not

vli.

/Acy

^'^t-* Hni'MMMtinff him,

Mmbx

with

to

!; A.c.iHiii. 2j

Hpicilc^iiun, p. va!i lino

uncommon

ono of

"
^*j-**l
*

the

So also ya!i fwitttlniiif^Tiim 1 8

twyiuffi Litko
/

voi'lm

anii

fi;

Iris

inniinorllioptiKKivopnrti-

cxMiju^ation has in

M, Mailh, xiv.

as,

]>assivo con-

ft!

used;

Matllt. iv 1.

ftmii of tin* active participle; nw, cni^ cc

Iwk

Soo also

of active coiyufpiiionH, and

as,

lit

10.

vorlw in lh

thai,

(bn'<*

51.

AHn

!W;

//v/ A//

mhnii mi aociisjiliw;
i.

xii.

ho jnvpositiou

unftr|uonl

hnvn tho

ExixL

//o/'t

2ft*

<tr tr it/tout ft

si-d

\vhi<*h |u*rforuiA

two

tho

V<T!>H coining togc.-

ofltoo

of an adverb to

the other, ouch verb bohtg in tho sumo number, Bonder,

^/^ ww^A 2 Cor.

and

Ic-nw^, an, ^'>^* u*^x]>

f^o

viii,

15

grwtly watted him, Phil

<niifi*>

^^otf
*

iL

II

jol |L| yo5tl

XJCK, Ul

//rr/A

//##

/ w7/ ayah

*lo ^ooj y/^>

//c

fasti

% jbo^ Gcn

^^/, Luke, xx. 11, 12;

SYNTAX OP VEEBS.
entreated
not be spoken

Ui^3

<p9o^ ^scta ^aoZAj

7&e

changed the

tfAdtf

them any more, Hebr.

to

CTLSU^AO

175

xii.

letter craftily >

19

should

^i^]
Bar Heb.
;

p. 100.

There are instances in which the second verb

found in the

infinitive, the inflexion of the first de-

pending on circumstances
no more
will not

>l^

see>

is

Job

vii,

]v*^>

uaaaoil P shall

NP ou^SsoS 002

any more curse

^sifflQio

as,

^coo] p

the ground, Gen.

viii.

21;

again they say, Assem. T. III. p. 56,

col. \.line 20.

The second verb


with

near

to

prefixed
tie

confirmed,

The

occasionally found in the future

is

as, *-$$LA.ZJ La^jo (the suspicion)


i.e.

confirmed

Bar Heb.

was

(the suspicion) was almost

p, 551, line 11.

participle of the second verb

is

found, as

we

might expect, as well as any other inflection of it


as, which book he desired oiL ]*> cnizta j that he read;

mg

might admire,

it,

ingly,

Assem, T.

i.e.

that he might read it admir-

II. p. 345, line 31.

Miscellaneous Observations.

The ordinary method


reflective sense is

by a

liaa united to the

instances done

transitive verb with the

affixes.

But

it is also

noun

in some

by means of the passive conjugations.

In the Ethpeel;
ix. 22.

of expressing a reciprocal or

as,

tia]

See also John

he turned himself, Matth,

viii. 6, 7,

59.

170

RYKTAX OF VERBS.

as, ]!*4

xxi.

VH'bshzivo Komrtimos a passive


signification ;
to iMMtlff, for lo Ic dccekefl, trhavaveat, Luke
Tor

S; JL/tf'/ww/,
K
"

for te

,/?>//,

xiii.

30:*

tffflrf
rfflwi, John iii. 24;
fc^ Ml/vcted, was lorn
up, as

f/Ytf

for

twtutMf,

IMS burnt, Matth.

by ihcir roots.

Thoro

is

no form of

mood.

livn

Imlictilm*

3<\>r

expressing the Optapurpose tlie future of the

usn of il

fh

(SCM*

tlin v(rl>

ihis

WiwI, the nmtesf or homo


this wiiM' of Ihr vorl>

Jut* p.

is

The pronoun

r(quir<i

'iww in NtiinbrrH xi.

as 10} ^D docs in

ij^

poi IfrftvN

Jj

ioc

in

w*

///<// /A/ir

1WM ffivw

iMQi*fo

fit in

into

^i

my

found (o indicate thoOptativo mood;


*///*/

r/i>

fix. xvi. 3.

noi<

^o
o//?

jfJ^fe

20: cn,^*| ^j

ix.

Imvft wiltatttwl pufisn^cfl in

20 wo have

///ff/ r/// ///^

v*

ordinarily

pnrticlo dotormining that

M rvM ihinpurpoAn;

is

303)

woi,

Hotewx and

which ono of the


IA

employed to

de-

mood.

Compound words in

(ironk arc translated into Syriac

by Himplo wonln, either alono or in conjunction with


another word or pm*tteto ; as, ^<I foreknowing, Acts

xwl.
m&Djo
xx. 4

A^l
* *

ft }

//<-

w>j

^t
*

'

fw^^f

ft^w Ww

or <We/

o with many others.

Mark

xttL 23

onlw*

^<nJ
*

Urn, John*

SYNTAX OF ADVERBS.

Syntax of Advert*.

57.

The

177

repetition of adverbs, like that of nouns, ex-

presses

intensity

diversity

tinuation

t^o

as,

as,

**+s very "badly

^A-S

as,

^J^> by

^Jifl

<md

hither

]*

thither

and

little

or

or con-

little.

Adverbs are used to qualify nouns by being placed


sometimes before them, and sometimes after them ;
as,

l-i

^Ao

water9 ]&IDCU

little

|vS^yj ,^co many widows, Luke

lecwen, I Cor. v.

little

^>^o
X

iv.

25

a few days,

When ^-^a
*

6.

and

are put before nouns, they seem themselves to be

nouns, or to have the force of them, and might be


translated,

little

quantity

0fand a great quantity of

respectively.

in

Adverbs derived fcom the names of nations ending


are found sometimes with and sometimes

without a prefix;

as,

or
M^oiio,
X

or Iula|/j Arabice.

r&ke,

An

adverb

prefixed

T^^o^s,
is

^aj

by a noun with
>

]i<&*^

Syriace

So we have MJO!D, or
X

2u^Uo^ JEjpyptiaM.

by means of a noun with *


a moment of time, l&^t? imme-

expressed

as, }te>*

diately, ]iDQA

or

M^om
X

craftily,

Iz&thso diffusely.

daily.

Again, an abverb

prefixed;

]l\La

lastly 9

as,

Uo^ua

is

formed

astutely,

KVXTAX OK

S8.

Pfl'iwwil

thus

i<

is

Ml

trto

\vitU

verbs

me, onlotoD

(It'Hy

in

or twwHrifi

ivith

ns

V^ji

K 7

/^

j]

uw?d with

ww?

V<V!>B

^o

vtrl< of wrwtttf? or
commanding
Kvii. 5

Vf*r1iH

of //"%

as,

or

ius

Jtmcui

of twninffg n, U]

iw **ll *f rfi/w//W,

7/t*

fid

vi*rhn of wtHtwthtff

f/W MiMwfptl POJU*^


with

Biguifyiiig to confess or

''-^ P?
the rfw^ t Jcilin x, ], 2.

V^ Af* wwrnlt JUflith.


(1mm. xxstvl. 2.

whh

with, verbs

verbs of HCIIHO arc construed with

many

////

Prepositions.

ms aw* mnployod in conned ion

found

also

>//'////;

Syntax nf

between

//(?

Mark

<?<m/

John

vi,

^i;

rww, 1 Oor. x*v. 1

A<?

The

others nro fmjuontly

t^/VA* aiul

at,

many
)*) ^Acai>

v, 30.
vii,

23

The

Vaa^ ^ww/,^*

pn'jHmilions

*8ee
;

frit*

A<'t**

(Oicooi p

xxv.

prefix o>

ii

Hobn

r^t/W no/ evil; Matth.

Mattlh xivi, 02
ft ;

agaimt) >oL

ucd with verb*

vi, 0,

Act*

iv.

14; Bom*

Ac*

somotimos nob expressed, but

SYNTAX OF P&EPOSITIOKS.

noun

understood, before a
as, c-s]

many
xiii.

A-a
*

)^joj

mansions,

John

in a state of construction;

m my -Father's home are

^tp^a
X 5"^

<QJ]

179

See also Acts

xiv. 2.

vii.

20

29.

The preposition ,10 followed by a noun is found to


express, by way of periphrasis, an adj., or to give to
the noun the sense of an adj. ; as, ]!v r* he was
5

of the celebrated
T.

I. p.

-*?

md

426. col. 2. last line but one.


that which is

which

is impossible,

to be

met with

ii.

T. III. p. 605.

ib.

p. 54.

I.

t&J&ChD p ^o ? o,
and that

of the impossibles, ie.

1.

^i

whom God

dead. Acts

After

iii.

ko

also

This preposition

7.

used as in the following example, |ou

|^ic L^a ^ao

is

See Matth. i 12

as redundant.

9 ; Assem. T.

also

he was celebrated, Assem.

ones, i.e,

is

>Q*G] cruL
*

hath raised from among the

15.

and other

particles signifying between,

various particles are used, which in English have the


1st. The copulative o
ZUs between interior and exterior,

force of the conjunction and.


itself; as,

Upo o^

Bat He*,

p. 473.

1.

Us?o5o

3.

the armies and the chiefs,

frequently;

as,

-nflJop

Edessa, Bar Heb. p. 60.


earth

and heaven,

between you

md

ib.

the

ib.

1.

1.

17.

2nd.

between

Lomad

2us between Haran and

13.

275.

Uo^la ''Ax^*

604.

1.

U^ V1
5;

sons of the

]f

Zus between

niraS ^oalu-o

Church,

Assem.

)2*^ rocn^^ between them


and the waters, Bar Heb. p* 511* 1, 9, 10. 3rd. by

T. III. p. 307. last line.

80

CONJUNCTIONS.

as, <psiiw M0iQiJ>

5so;

^o A

xx. 17*

L 19,

p. 270,

ib. p.

nrwy>

2*9

<!OOH

me and

fL-Ao <pouua

412.

with

and

hi* mother,

between,

profixwl to

if

affix

5^1

them and tfo

but tbo

as, micJJo

Bar Hob,

C&

p. 507,

1.

between him <wd the king,

1.

Matth.

Bar Heb.

tJiee,

10.

not take an

**s

Mm and them*

between

ZUD between

affix follows

flus

between him

16, 17,
ib, p.

lua between Iheu and them,

ib.

Zus

cni*

421,

p.

2, 3.

408.

If).

Whon

]iji.

IH

followed by the prefix

particle 1m vo th
ciZoicik

^ A r^^ ^

Itonwl), Mafih.
jlj

for<*o
/;

of mr^M*

in Latin.

^ ^' ^^^ ^'^^ 7^^^ ^^

two

tlio

]ooio

^^

(of

15,

withtwti laki*H

no

affix

but when a pronoun

follows, it in

a neparato pronoun

we, John xv.

5.

A noun

rt

afl,

]j]

p> without

by A#rdl nomen nitdum, 1.0. a noun


without proilxcB or afllxo.s, IB xiaod as a proposition ;
n lij^r, Bnr Mob, p. 203, hint lino; *-^su >Z]/or my

p, 59,

called

r3 ^/ ^j

U**

1,

<pl

investigation^

ib,

8.

50.

A conjunction

Conjunctions.

on many occasions not expressed


in a Kmtenco, but understood, Tho conjunction o
!*

as,

181

CONJUNCTIONS.
Matth.

ix.

>oo0 Arise, go, Gen. xxxi

ySoi ysoD #n$g #?#?& (and) ^0 o# tf%

\i

y*S^p

<-ooa

7.

Acta Mart.

See also

II. p. 293.

the two last examples the

13.
,/eetf.

In

Is. xxxvii. 37.

Vau would

naturally drop

commands

are often given under the influence


of excitement, and consequently in as few words as
out, as

We

possible.
ix.

32

have also an

xviii. 6.

<J

and

]&9\> oil* -*>KT?O


*
^^
x

him, Gen.

Vau is

xlii.

is

(if)
'
^

sometimes understood;

tribulation should

as,

happen
**

to

38.

often found prefixed to each word, or step

of the sentence

and

>^>o

as,

Our Saviour

1Sfi4\ ^CL^O
buried,

Kings

^3L two or three eunuchs.

^iSnVuiSs ]&Sz,

See Isaiah

ellipsis of oj in 2

arose,

^ioZ]o

suffered,

and ascended

to

ILLoo ^ojoa

and

died,

heaven.

**

and was

Bar Heb.

In explanation of this liberal use of


the Vau, Hoffman in his Gram., p. 383, note, says,
"Animo commotis etiam polysyndeton interdum
p. 51, last line.

conjunction is repeated when the clauses of the


sentence to which the said conjunction is appended
ore used correlative!^; as,o

Gen. xxiv. 25;

*aj,
o],

Matth.

vi.

24.

<]

*ai

o,Bx.xxi. 16;
<],

Different

Horn, i 16;

.. r

...o]

conjunctions are fre-

quently employed in a sentence in this correlative

manner;
Acts

i.

as,

11; Jo

Eev. x il

2.

y*], Is. Iv,

\&9\
<j,

2 Oor.

xii.

9;
2;

>]> y4 M ...,J26tfi,

CONJUNCTIONS.

The

particle *, besides being a

of the Gen.

has tho

is

pronoun and a mark

also used as a conjunction.

force of that.

when

i.e.

it is

construct ocl with a verl) in the future

used

found
!

with

in connection

fdKM<rf Malih.

Bar Hob.

JWH,

p.

^Z^cf w/v/

linen 7,

that,

!1>,

jLs

>

ii.

>

20,

'*^o

causal, it is

but

when

12, 15. &c.

8,

it is

as,

>&]^ wheresoever.

L1

t*msi

It is

other particles

many

vi. II).

10.

1.

it

may be found with a prate-

as that,

John

viii 28,

fcwuw*, Bar Hob. 112,


ib,

iy/?<r M</<,

xx vi, 28; Lulco xxiL 20.

JUfttth.
iv,

it

Sue Mitt tit. L 22;

rlta.

another senso,

in

When

3D, 7>

to ^i,

]i wto, Mark

fc^fffw, Mflr Jacob's Scholia,

p 1,
?'*! twwtttCi War Hcb. 158, 12. There are
lttian(50 in which the conjunction * is omitted, $ ^>||
?

1.3.

(101

fOj|

Hero

!H

J00

(tliat)

/ wmy <?^A

aloofly itn ollipHiB of

jb^

Iwforo

John

xxi. 3.

jp^f.

o imn tho force of that; especially


copttlutivo
aftw vorlw of aM#ff or wmwandlng, Epliraim T. I.

The

p. 81, J?

There aro

410, D. 8, 0.

p.

tlonal uHCrt.

o]

'porfonna the

to

y, 7, o

has the

which have oxcepmaking a comparison,

otlior conjunctions,

and thu

it

In Job

^P; a

employed
"it

t
nwdgned
the
and
in
Bidon
Tyro

in

office

flhali

clay

which

is

usually

be more tolorablo

of judgment

for

,-& J\ thm

for you: Matth. xL tt.


is

uod

with a formula of imprecation;

as,

" God

183

INTERJECTIONS.

do so to thee, and more


conceal

sware,

>ojo

]4i*S >oLJ

down"

the sim be

Cant.

vi. 31.

)2u& ~&o IJQDO^ $

ifthau,

" David
from me a tlvmg" 1 Sam. iii. 17.
saying, So do God to me, and more also,

oj>

li^oi

also,

See also 2 Kings

35.

iii.

P J the same as Vh DN has the force

9.

i.

Sam.

if I taste bread before

<]

of yea, verily > in Job.

ii.

5,

and elsewhere.

60. Interjections.

Interjections

the preposition

woe

which denote threats have commonly


^-a^ ~o
; as, Eccles, x. 16,

^ following

Matt. -T"i- 13,

to thee.

^ MO woe

iv. 8;

to us.

See Matth.

Sometimes the preposition


or,
^ocruS^, ^o^ to them;

Gram.

p. 449,

l^oi

l^f*-

When interjections
tion, the

sition

^Q^ ^o woe to yqp.

is

^^;

xiii.

1 Sam.

yri"- 13.

as/Jer. L. 27, *o

according to Amira,

wo^

tno]

to this generation.

are employed to express lamenta-

nouns which follow do not receive a prepo-

as,

M^P 010]

alass

my dwghter

Judges

xi. 35,

See 1 Kings xiii 80 ; Eev. xviii. 10> 16, 19.


^1 is a particle of invoking aa well as of affirm-

See Gen. xxx. 34. ^o2u[

ing.

always joined with the particle

wA

^oZuoji ^(-limsn

% Cor.
|oi

xi. 1.

behold

that ye

See also Gal.

iii.

O that is
^; as, ^*>

almost
tao&*1

would bear with me,

4.

This interjection serves to

mark em-

phatically the sentence, or that part of the sentence,

18'1

INTEHHOGATIVES.

at the beginning of

whero

especially

0iZcui4
honJ,

which

it is

teMfitt or vicis is signified

Mark

ix.

"That ihou hast smitten me

21.

the Ntnv Testament ?m


tliu

Greek particle
Maltlu

is

>/5^

as, ^cua

(fail

Sometimes
Beo Gen,

flie

vcrhj

verb

iiin

7,

>

&e.

Hebrew*

although tho ninpilat

uxu/w

and

i^>

tho

V
with X prefixed,

the conjunction

^00^

It
!N

Ls

noun

Se
iw

7^///

It

mot

which tho

Maltlh

v-

without VS.

3;

<j

is

found with a

occasionally

^> following, to

inteiji!<;tion rafara,

Somrtirnt'K

is

|oi

v. 46.

of the person

piS> cnS

us,

Iwhlcttd of

in

and a noun with


the

in in tlie, infin,

found in 1 Bum. xxiv.

affix,

preceding,

he nhouhl do, Job. xxxiv, 10* See Matth*

xlir. 7.

same an *7f8

JJ

^ ^^ ^

f<n

See Itatlh.

cmiHtrucd with

//, is

prefixed io

jl^J

With

10.

iii.

In

xxii, 28.

often found as the translation

interrogatively.

h$

^ij

as,

*& iMtailh to him, Mold, from Us child-

^osj &lz ]m IwfioM, three tiwes" Niimb.

of

It is used

placed.

plu,

with,

affix
Pfi*

is

the

of

i 1

See Deut,

xxxiii. 20,

Question* arn

pronoun*

U*-l //^o /

n^ked not only by interrogative


particles, such a*

but alo by various


llicu'j

^e frwn whence?

Tbwe wo many Jatemgative

or

whcref&&

ientonoe0, which hftve

185

INTERBOGATrVES.

no

mark them; but which the context


In these cases the prominent word in

particle to

shews to be.

commonly begins the sentence

the question

^o

]oou>

art thou the

Jews ?

the

kmg of

001

LJ]

Matth.

xxvii. 11.

A question with
tion; as, ]>L*
^

)2|

J3

ordinarily comprises

^^

]L=>)]

)LS9

-*G\
ae

an

<p2uj
-

affirma-

P say not

ye that after four months cometh harvest ? John

When, however, a
is

question is asked by

implied; as, o*2LaLo^

p-x

tVwr

devil able toopen the eyes of the

times a doubt

The

last

it is
'

pj]
8.

remark

bUnd ? Job

|^S

is

Some-

x. 21.

\^

is

applicable to the particle *o

used interrogatively ;

as,

when

.^4^0

|Zailacn <^o

__

and shall Hejindfwth on the earth ? Luke xviii.


The particle <] is employed to express what

Uhlemann
us jau^j

calls indirekte

ofip IMJ^V) 001

The interrogation
of the disjunctive

question
7 P 7

more

tf&atf

is

<J

o|

distinct

that thou tell

whether thou art the


63.

sometimes continued by means


to make,

and

who hath simed f

ix. 2,

Matth.

L]

as,

it

would seem, the

definite

as, jjoi

|^u 01^0

<^oiooo) o|

John

Frage;

Son of*Goti ? Matth. xxvi

Christ, the

*^

J-^^^n |Q^

*+>

is

li^ a negative

\i]
Lord, is it
implied; as,
Matth. xxvi. 22. See also John ix. 27 ; xviii. 25,

If

iv. 35.

>

omSn

Aow^
xi. 3.

this

mem

or his parents ?

001 ~*i*t)] o] \i}) 001 001 LJ|


x

art thou
'

'

if

or cfo we look for <wotfteff


(?o^,
See also Assam* T, I. p. 87.

EXALLAGE OF PEKSOSS.

180

The

affirmation or denial of a question

is
usually
tho
verb
and pronoun, which
madnliykocpiugkick

the question; as, ....


*

dt'ftno

ZjScjJ" yo'ji

^Lj foZcsi*
^

jLfa]) yjjloio ^i*LcL*, oficjo /WM //* 7w/W, my brethren,


t/wf, irlifcfi I hnn* mM ! And I hay amwcrcd, We have
Itrttf'd envy thing vhkh thon haul said.
Assom. T.

p.

375. 1 7.

The

ftf /'

dom

of persons

enallnjye

not occur so

fre-

in Hebrew, and
quently in Byrinct a
especially as
in the JM>n*w TsjilinH ; but *omo instances are

mot with

mpl
art

(tj>

the Hyruut HeripturcB

in

lllp

ilop

o]

for

3rd petwn

2nd

lul
u,

for

jl^ fto di2o2^f

Die

^t*?

ii

1,

1M^ r=^

P=^ j

2uL
not

iniquity,

twiitgwwtoto <\f tlw

witidne

tyt

wt and
I,

Mntwt

3rluab

vll.

18,

nvts whuro
.<?,

tbn

and yass*
his

of

wo havo

3rd per.

tho

^OMI

2nd

fot ^peenZi
H<*o

uho

Gal

iv.

21,

Inuiah xlil

f,e?.

21

in*

mio^f.

for tho 2nd,

wlioro
luivn

the

loi

unto {hw*t fwyiriHg

ing

i.<?.

^r w

4^0^; y&odt

(iwl lib*
ft**

^4^

jwlgeth his MighloWi

^p* Bom,

where we bave mya*

lui

^ &A wfwwfore tlm

uaaio

wwi who

itWMUwhl<\

OH,

tho 3rd,

wo

pom for

187

ELLIPSIS.

63.

Ellipsis.

This figure occurs most frequently in the omission


of the substantive verb

as, caeca* <JOA,O

md his name

was Joseph. oiZoajj ^^] those who (are) like him, Bar
Heb. 328. 12. There are other words which it is
sometimes necessary to supply in order to complete
the sense ; as, a subs, in Eocles.
if a

man

shall beget

once have
Lsxxix. 35

vi, 3,

]]D

a hundred, namely sons;

sworn, where ^s)

is

Zulcu

these

ttlso

things that were written (were written) that ye


believe,

John xx.

|^

understood. Psalm,

<ojiacn; ^a*&a? ^*Loi ^|,

l^o^^oj J

may

35.

There axe very

many passages

in which a

00/*&

of

some kind or another has to be supplied, in order to


complete the sense ; as, t*22cji ]^D^ mtil when 9 viz.
wilt thou bring assistance, Fs. yi. 4;

blessmff

(may

1^] )iUo

}3a^

it

come) ^po^

fpz

^5co y& ^^

people, Ps.

iii*

9;

destruction qf the impious

<wd the wicked (will come) together, Isaiah i. 28.


There are some sentences in which a word requires
to be repeated, in order to obtain a full and connected sense;

as, JLoftj?

^oou <nLa

^J

]><n

but all this

which was done (was dotie) that it might


Matth. i. 22. See also John xx. 31 Bom. r*
:

Heb.

vii.

18,

viii. 3.

188

COLLOCATION OF WORDS,

An

accusative

brought
viz.

1 Sam.

Noli. xiiL 25

xiv. 42.

*f

v-ic5)

Also to

^j

in

nominal ivo
7

iii-

5,

*"

to

is

Ls

w*W

"be

^^

also

IB

viz.

the

John k.

7,

lot,

some

supplied,
as

LoX]
r^^^"*
B

anger) be retained for ever?

(UiH

Tlusni

occasionally omitted:

^^
Jor.

fo mtf,

1^

such noun a

Gen. xvi. 1;

forth> via. sows,

ic /#,

as,

sometimes omitted;

is

an

ellipsis in

the Hebrew.

A noun cxpreswod in the early part of the

sentence

not rotated in a following part with some


genitive,
the
the
aonso,
although required l)y
genitive alone
i

t '

being put?
(the fflory)

<*

pi

r/if//<?

<nio&

Matilu

///>

Hi. 4.

<*ff

ow/// h'flotttM

*^

clot hi ttff

Ju*ol?

in

ft

&* g^ry

as

of the Father, John

repeated,

wf(ft

^?

v\ *****

^lo? t*r*"T|

Jn tho (Jm*k

L 14,
Ifkif

a*,

|om t-.moLl

(the clothing) qfhafo,

)Zo>ra

2ul

JAa^

tti9thMMy 9 w&fak

hgrwlwttwn the testimony qfJofa,


In
John v. 3(1
comparisons thia mode of oonstmo
tion itt prevalcud, of whicli the last example is an in*
An <illii>His of a word expvoHsitig a definite
fitanop.
portion of time

us, >oo*

^, or

]iXx4

a y<?ar

is

quite

common.

In gcwornl the collocation of words in Byriao is


simple and natural ; but in some instances it departs

COLLOCATION OP WORDS,

A few of these

from the ordinary rules.


may be well to notice.

The verbs

]o<n

and

of

189
instances

it

are sometimes so placed in

a sentence that the grammatical connection of the


former part with that of the latter is dissevered ; as,
^T

old,
us,

<-Aiiz

|o<n

Ex.

vii.

make

bricks,

and Moses was

tioioo

^ r^\ U^ md

oi$l

Ex,

eighty years

v.

16

they *ay to

^-o* ^rn^o fr fti

a hundred and twenty years

old,

p lam

Dent. xxxi.

2.

personal pronoun standing for the logical copula

A
is

found placed between two nouns in a state of regi-

men;
John

as, >o0ipl>

,OM

oiL)] toe

are the seed of Abraham,

S3

viii,

In a long sentence the verb is occasionally found


at the end of it, and separated a long distance from
its

object; as,

Ephraim

fcL^

p^

T. II. p. 210. D. 6...E,

li^....,,v*a*

a banquet,
made
The verb is also
3.

many words from

found separated by
as,

he

y^,

<]

its auxiliary;

ifthou art indeed able

to read, ib. T. II. p. 211. 0. 8...D. 2.


|ocn

and he did not wish

to be

fatigued

verb comes before that on which


p.

212. 0.

The

5, 6.

before the verb

on which

T. I. p. 83. D. 3,

A noun

infinitive
it is

it

with

depends,

j]

jti.^o

where the
ib.

T. II.

prefixed comes

dependent in Ephraim

sometimes comes after both the verb and

100
its
~

SYRIAC METRES.

object;
ti

as,*

lest

for they feared

Tho

Acts. 7. 26.

^s

~ v^

'

N^^^

the people should stone

them,
object is found between the auxili-

ary and the verb in Matth. xxi.

1,

and other

places.

There are instances of particles occupying unusual


''* ?
as the Adverb
Mark i. 45
places;
ZUjli^in
"

00
;

\>

reprove

openly to enter the city ; P in

me

^>

not in Mine anger, Ps, vi.2.

04,

Kyriae Metre*.

According to Halm, tho first hymnologist of the


Syrians was the celebrated Gnostic Bardesanes, who
flourished in tho second half of tho second century.

la

this

ho

is

in

some degree supported by Ephraim

in his 5Srd homily, against heretics, T. II. p. 553,

where, although ho

docs

hot actually assert that

wiw tho iuvontor of measures, yet he


HpeakB of him in terms which show that he not only
wrote hymns, but also imply that at least ho revived
Barctoflamss

and brought into fashion a

taste

for hymnology.

Theso are his words:

he composed hymn*,

and adapted them

(mixccfy

to

eoundt; he ako composed psalms, and intro-

STEIAO METRES.

191

md

duced metres, and distributed words ly measures


These hymns were, according to the same
weights.
authority, called "by various names,

They were

de-

nominated U>'r^? which word, according to Castell

by

Michselis, signifies

Hymns

of mawy
and Uf*^i o* If^l

consisting

strophes, l^oli

poems, -*fu.
xx songs,

Psalms.

stated that

he wrote 150 Psalms in

number

of the Psalms of David.

It

imitation

is

of the

|ac

"Whether the poems bearing the different names here


mentioned make together the number 150, or whether

they are comprised in the

(4^1
X

alone, is not cer-

tain.

Ephraim says that the heresy of Bardesanes


became powerful, because the people were taught
through poetry, and they were consequently influenced
and charmed by the melody of his numbers. It was

by

this contrivance that

he succeeded in infusing his


who were attracted by

poison into the minds of those

the power of his teaching. He gathered around him


a company of youths whom he taught to sing to the
harp.

Ephraim

]op*^ vMft
vomited

says, in T.

cnZ^q by

the youth.

II. p. 489.

the melodies of his

D, Uaioos

Psalms he

It is to be regretted that of the

Hymns of Bardesanes, which it appears, in consequence


>f

their high poetic

merit, exercised an extensive

fatfluen.ee

over the religious opinions of the age in

which he

lived,

much

strength and popu-

larity to his gnostic ertore, a very

few fragment* only

and gave

so

102

RVJIFAC METRES.

Thiw

remain.

fragments arc <o be found scattered

ovor <ho workfl of Ephrnim.


that we arc indebted for all

logy of Bardosanes, and of

wrve.

Jt is to this lioly father

we know

tin*

c<mse

of tho
it

testimony, however, after making some


nipunal tho gnoptio heresy,

Jli.s

for lim sw*ai

alhnvnnoe
wliitih

determined him to concentrate

of hut

mind

know

1o ilie ronlvary,

On

io put

vvr

rity,

At

l>o

Hi<*

fi*t of

the*

numhoriul

main

ini*trc in

which Bardesancs

amo

hymn

autho-

05

tlww wordn P^

M^o^Af

qf

the powers

aocc ptcxl as in the

ntust <*<>ntiu(* io nprnk on the

(in*

all

down, ought for anything we

it

t!m Bubjwt ofthe

wrote

Hymno*

was meant to

//if/v*

wng*

19

to

end HewntMK hyniw

(if

JhmfaaM*.

incluniv^

thr; l^tHHlictiiMMfdiitou

cally, BO tlmf

to the

mea*

Thcwo hymns are


is a pity that

It

did not arrange thorn metri-

th^ nitMiHuro of tho verno might bo at


Aft or a nhort examinathe* oycf.

once prrnratful to
tioit*

liow<vr,

it

may

bn

H<rt^rtain(?d

are irrilton in pontoyll<iWc

of

Ilahn, in hia

fivo wyllahlf^

," p.

M,

litM j?iv<n

ing oftmflvo IUHH of


lino in nn follows,

the

tlio >10tli

flrnfc

is

poems

line eon-

"Bardosanoe

utrophe oonsit-

hymn-

oo ]s^ ^ai ///^

wwptwwl tcitk MM.


U may he nlmwYed

that those

vcwo, U. och

TIiD twelfth
/<?

Atw

t&Aa

This in a doxology, and auch


the butt lino of each airopho of

METRES.
the poem.

It

is

the custom was

193

probable that in the Church service,


for the congregation, or the whole

In some poems,
the
such as the 53rd,
doxology is found only at the
end of the first strophe ; but in such cases it is most
choir at least, to sing the doxology.

likely that

it

was understood

at the

end of each of the

There arc other hymns, such as the COth and


others.
llahn conjectures
6Jith, that contain no doxology.
that in these, the congregation might have used

one of the doxologies best

known

at the time*

some

Some-

times the doxology consists of two qr three verses, as


in

hymn

50, p. 19,

Praise

and E, where wo have,

to

him, who

wut him

13lc3sed be his coming*

Harmonius, the son of Bardesanes, stands next in


the history of this subject, both chronologically and
for his successful cultivation of sacred poetry.

He is

have studied at Athens, and to have become well acquainted with the literature of the Greeks*

reported to

Some

writers have stated that he indeed

was the

first

compose hymns in Syriae, and they assign to him


the honours, which by on almost general consent
to

have been assigned to his father. This statement is


not in any way confirmed by Ephraim, who, in con*
sequence of Ms position and of the time in which he
lived, is

undoubtedly entitled to be regarded as the

ItH

SYIUAC METRES.

It is said that he also trod in the


of
his
father in regard to the
footstep**
gnostic docin
mid
thufc
imitation
of
trine*,
Bardosanes, ho,

greatest authority.

too,

wrote pnefry for ihe purpose of


propagating those
lewts*
In AHNpnumi Btbl Orient., Tom.
L,
48,
p.

the foltmvini* extract from a


Syriao
the Vatican on KerleR, Hist. t**jp? ot
is

note,

^ S^
n
*, tftt*

of

How
relieil
In*

fjtr

on

MM

it

tittuwlf

)cm

|fciV.a?r.!^ |ooi 2
9

wfming

w/v/#;w, allured

Kphntim

mil Iw easy loMty, hut

Mir\*il llml

hi*

hk Iwyktyin

(miring)

wwlium ftf/he

fheHtiilemoiil of

may

l&Jku,Z >*,$

in

tofIhwlMfntM fofuMrly composed

/'////

/>/v*/w

ht\ //v 'A**

fO

y^o ]Ati+9

MS.

(p,

301)

it ia

Mtd^HwrnrH

t/te

may ho

evident ifiat

wore strongly

hy po( ry and music. 'Whdhcr the motive


imputes to !iat'desan<'.s whioh Ims boon ciuotod, bo

in Ilti(n<jed
IK;

or not,

it

Is

<

erluhi that

Bphraim

also

made

of HUM instrument for eounloractiti^ the baneful


wluelt Ihe vriiiiii{M of Hnnh'fwines had produced.

He

looked upon thoHr

t'H'curtH

with groat diHmuy and

expreHHed lumwlf piinst them

In

Itin

Hfi\

newmipmtyinK

IUH

in

tho Btrong<mttorms*

work^ Tom,

VL p

53,

by nn unonymotiK author, ho ! ruado to ay: cursed


i* h<*> who ihnlt ^///, tut fa (liardoitanc^) mid: kt him
be MwttottM

who

*hM Mtow, $* he Mtewd &o- Wo

biogrnplH^r what rticana Ephraim


tho foibwerH of Bardceancs to
to
back
adopted
bring

ant told hy thiH

SYEIAXJ METRES.

195

the pure doctrines of the Church.


daughters of the convent*

lie

He

established

taught them odes and scales

of music and responses. Every day these daughters of


the convent were gathered together in the church.

Jfyhram, as the father9 stood in the midst of them,


arrwginff and teaching them the various chwts,

8fC. 9

was gathered together to him, and the


was
adverse party
confounded and defeated. The extant works of Ephraim prove that he must have dili*
till

all the city

gently cultivated this art.

them

A considerable

consists of compositions

Whatever obscurity and doubt


of

hymnology among

portion of
metres.

in various

exist as to tho origin

tho Syrians,

it is

certain that at

no time subsequent to Ephraim did it reach a higher


state of perfection than it attained to through the
labours of that holy father.

I have already said that the metre in which Bardesanes wrote is pentesyllabic,

i.e.

that each line con**

Metres in Syriac, so far as a


knowledge of thorn has come down to us, consist not
gists

of five syllables*

number of feet as tn, Greek and Latin,


but of a certain number of syllables. Dr. Burgess,
of a particular

whose Essay on this subject In his " select


metrical hymns and homilies of Ephraim Syrus," is

indeed,

am

acquainted, thinks
that there are traces of an artificial arrangement of

by

far the best

with which, I

by which the sense is in some cases obscured,


and that there might have existed among them a
words,

theory as to accent, or quantity*

If

so,

that theory

02

SYEIAC METEES.
has not been discovered, and
of a Syriac metro

number

is,

that

it is

all

thai

we can

yet say

determined by a certain

In

of

this respect
syllables.
they are similar
of
the
to
measures
our o\vn hymns,
except that the
do
not
to
have
written
much in rhyme.
Syrians
appoar

Thus the

octosyllabic metro woiild correspond to our


The Hhortcst measure, so for as we are

long metre.

was tetntsylMic, and the


longest

able to Bpealc,

The intermediate measures are penteh&MttyUhic 9 and ovloMjlluUo. Not one of

thorn)

mn.s

motm<4

to be confined to
subjects of a

particular character; but all of thorn are found emin lively as will

ployed

To

m in Holwuu compositions.

the ncwffisilinA of the metro

incc i t

wo

find that

SytuftWhiH and DWWHI'H arc Homctimos employed,


each of which wu will now briefly epoaL
Syntorosifl in the contraction of

two

of

syllables into

regarded as a pootic licence indulged


in to maintain tlw motro; thus, tho 5th rerse of the
It

ono.

lt

may bo

strophe of liyiun 49 already quoted

Hero aro

]iox*0.

hymn.

Tfc to

therefore necessary to

tho mhliUfl vowol

tho atom* vorms

initial

o!Wl]J

HIX syllablofl in a pentesyllabic

make two

syllables

Now in verbs

Into one-

ooctttfl

is

in

of tho Ethpaal conjugation


sometimes withdrawn. Hence

is i*oad

foUkfatfb chfafaho.

Synaoresis

word by taking away the


^ot^oZ Pmihirtm, Hero the

tn tho beginning of a

vowel

gylkblo

as, <wl

not pronounced.

So also we meet with

STEIA.O METRES,

^a| ^>ji

samenph,

hoclianph, &o.
V

//

met with in verbs ]a;

197

as,

"

c]

It is also

fy

d'lo*mar; in Greek

words beginning with S> which, in passing into Syriac,


9
<*

takes the initial

words of three

syllables,

when the middle


vowel;

tion

cially

UcoJ

as,

the vowel

first is

elided

a long unchangeable
In the middle of a word

r'lntho*

K^aZ]

whoro the second

away

the vowel of the

syllable has

in verbs; as,

In

Syr, ]snr>m] s&0a0.

sometimes passed over in the pronunciaJ7


V *

is

]Zo<n3> allnttno.
fall

0%wa

as,

] ;

eihph'lag ; in nouns, espe-

syllable has tho

Tho vowel

in a verb,

vowel

JL; as,

end of a word

at the

may

when the grammatical form will

continue to bo known, notwithstanding tho Vowel

omitted in tho pronunciation;


sob* with ; in

a noun,

as,

as,

JaS&

is

M'ph ; &afpo

1^ pagr*.

There are Instances whoro tho

first syllable

of a verse

taken away and made in tho pronunciation the last


Thus the deficiency
syllable of tho preceding verso,

is

in tho first vorso


next.

In

hymn

is

supplied by the redundancy of the

51>

Tom.

Ill, p. 94, lino 13,

we have

teoropen> where fooro ends oue verse, and

pen

begins the one which immediately follows.


Die&rosis lengthens a word by ono syllable ; so that
monosyllables become

dissyllables,

therefore, performs pretty

Mefatffyono

9,)*

Tho

much

difference

c.

the same

Dkeresis,
office as

between them sedma

to consist principally in this. Dicoreeis gives the force


of a towel in the pronunciation,

whore there would

SYKIAC METRES.

198

otherwise be a moving sheva9 a,n& Mehagyono exercises


the same force where there would otherwise be a
quiescent V sJieva.
*

as

if

Examples
*

^ocnui^; }\~&&

Disercsis wietlicheze ;

way

schebak.

are,

^ooiA^" lialayliun;

pronounced in case of
onn^ schbak becomes in the same

metlichze,

APPENDIX.

IT in sttttml in
10, that a simple point is someimrs used for various purposes. The
practice of the
writers appears to have been to employ

Hyriiui

point, which,

by

to \Utirh

is

it

its

wn<p

IwWt

position above or below the letter

aimuxcd, would determine the true

signification of a
til

word that would otherwise, in the

of the vowola, remain ambiguous.

flint

It is pro-

position of this point defined in

1h

some

di'^rw the kind of vowel intended to be supplied,

and thus served

UN

ft

quido in the pronunciation. The

following iusiunct'B of
pally from
l)<*

thft

its

Grammars

application, taken princi-

of Amira,

Hoffman and

Oini, will illustrate tho nature and utility of this

lj-1

\i\

rrj

what

|4 fl>fV

w
w

*
>,

lls

pwi

ttot

APPENDIX,

200
coi

oon

ocn

ocn

*s

"/

*-

"
{
V"?
{^OJCTl
I

^*j0i

<***?

o&
T^

IS
king.

infant*

ywr.

APPENDIX.

201

from the foregoing


examples, that tMs
the
of
office
point performed
vowels; that when it
wan pluwrl ovor the letter, it denoted for the most
It

jippruvK,

part cmo of the vowels


IrttiT,

denoted

il

, *,

or

*,

*,

and when beneath the

*.

This point was further used to

prwrms and
tlir

iti'jiili

It'tti'i*,

it

was put

he-

di'iiolcd,

All tho porMona of the prcoterite, the first of the

I.

sinif, ntinth.

The tliird person sing.


frwiucmtly on the left-hand side of

bring oxceptod-

has ihin poini

l'"tiu

llw

ii

distinguish the

"When

of verbs.

IITIHIS

last lit<<T I.

&

Tin*
iw

point

iuip(*nitiv

AH

H.

and

infinitive

whenever any

Iniunl

pofHonn of the future, the

mimtwr being
\Vlwn

it

of each

first

nxocpted.

phurod above a letter in verbs,

JH

it

de-

Ulltt'H,

I.

Tlw

llnrt.

2*

Tim

m*tlv

i^J,
1

iMfHon of the pnotorite.


pttrti<5iple;

l*fcel

to Pool coxtfug&tion

%ofc> %iuakj

riHtulrai It to

unless one of the

bo placed below;

as, >ou$io

or >cu4&
#

tho

find

pwwm

numlras of the

fixture.

paradigm af the Poal conjugation of


cxcwplUy wJmt luu been now etated.

Tit* following
will

of lioth

202

APPENDIX.

Prteterite.
Fern,

Masc.

3rd P 01 8 sing.
"

-9

'

2nd

............

1st

............

3rd pcrs. phi.


1st

............

Imperative.

^o^Lo

sing.

a^o^Lo

plu.

Future,
Yett.

o.

lnj

3rd pors.

j&)

1st

3rd

Participle.

......

APPENDIX.
This point in some places is found with
and in other places with another letter of the same

word.

The

distinction is produced only

by

its situa-

tion above or below the word.

The Names of the Months.

We

give here the

names

of the

which occur very frequently in the

Lunar Months,
Scriptures.

October,

November,

December,

tM| cQia

January,

February,

March*

QAUBKIUGB.
y, 1866.

LIST OF

WORKS

PUBLISHED BT

AND

DElUIITOtf, BELL,
Agent* to ito

00.

TTnlverslty.

ALP01UVR (Dm*) OrwkTofltament:

with a

critically revised

Tuatt : * Ww*t of Vanoua Riadugfl, Marginal


to Verbal
ul iMmuilto Uuag$
and a Critical and Exogetical
(tottuimitary. For iho ne ofTheological Studeatu and Matters
By

Bef&os

PwOwmona;

lihNHy
Vol

Arrows
Jtyth

l,

H
Vjl ;

D.D., Itoaa of OwitcrljiQry,


JSditioti,

oontuninar Uxo Four Gospels.

fm MMim,

ntliifliis,

VoL HI,

PhfllppUuiL
Philemon. 18*.

IV. fturl

I.

Mi4 the
V,

Pttrt

ttftdSt,

,_

U.

towil
l

Vl

U. 8%.

Aeto of the Apoetlw, the

ooateajiur th

nirrf JftiWow, oontainmg the


Ottthollo Bplatlof of

Bpifitle to

BtTjamM and elPeter

Third Sdition, oontftdnlng the Bptstles of


II
Jud^amdtlitBxmilAtion lit,

New Ttamont

for English Readers.

the
18^.

St.

Containing

w.

AnthorlHcd Yarmon, with twlditlonal coireotum* of Headings


lU'ttfttTinKH ; MurKinal IlrtoronceR; and a Critical and Explanatory
In
D,, Doon of Cantearbury.
(!itiMtu*ntHry.
Uy HKKIIT ALVoaii,

thi*

Plflft

for the Qu*tt'

B^uh;

Stray Notes on

By HBKET AI^OBD, D.D.

for'tko

LIST OP

WOEKS PUBLISHED BY

APOSTOLIC EPISTLES, A Oonoral Introduction

to the, with
a Table of Ht. 1'uul'n TruvelK, and an Ewwiy on tho Ntuto utter Heath.
A
are
Wwcta on tiro
To
which
Fuw
Second Mitwn, enlarged.
adilod,
AtiianaHian Growl, on Justification by Fuith, and on the Ninth uml
of
of
Church
the
Seventeenth Articles
KngluuL By u
CHAPIAIN. 8vo. 8*. ftf.

BABINGTON s

(CrruEoniiL, B.D., F.L.&)

Lecture on Archeology* dcllwwd before


By COTHMJIULL IUHINIITOS, 1U>,, F.L ft.

BAftRETT's

(A. C.)

An

Introductory

UN UnlvwHUy of <!umbrldK<'

Companion to the

Hvo, price 3*.

Now

Do-

Toatamont.

VWM

Koniw ui
algnod for the UHC of TncoloKioul Students ,m<l tlu*
Sohook By A. C BAHRKIT, ALA,, (tiuiihUollc^i. Kcup. Hvo, a*.

HE A MONT'fl

(W, J.) Cairo to Sinai and Hhiai to Cairo. HIMIIK


an Account of a Janrnpy lu tlm Uem^rt of Aruhk, KovinitH*r mm
DPoembor, 1800. By W. J. BKAM(HT, M, A, , Krlbw of Trinity ( Vlh^S
Ottmbrldifc, And tiicutnbnit of Ht, Michael's flnHtbrl<lgo, wnwrtlttir
Prindpal of thu KnKltoh CVjlIoKe, Jcrawilwm, With Mnpa and IlluKtrii
tlonft.
Foap. Hro, 5,
-

Grammar of the Arabic baritfuam


Aw NADT Kr- HAKWNV. Ity W, J, HRA^M f, M-A,

Concise

RevUKl by HHBIXU

BLUNT's (RBV.

Five Mormons mnoluri

J, J.)

nnivcrtlty of Cnmbrldfffl,

The

Ix^foro tho
fimt Four In trnriiiulKnf, IWIU th*- Firth

n TnumAay, Match Kth, 1H49, bring the


jmry

of

Unwlrod Rnd

Fifvlrth

o HooiAty for J'rormKlnff <Jhrbrtli Ktwwlr<lKi',


HLUMT, B.D. f lAdy Margttrot I'roftwr of

to Itot, J, J,
ro*

th*

00,04.
1,

BBOWNB's
Couwo

TwtH

of the Truth of R*ret*tfcmv*a.

On

KsttwtrtL
(Bi>.) Mowjfth aa F<ntvhnld and
of Hormom relating to th< Mnwluli, AK JntwiinicU Iwforc tttn
I'mtoluKl boftnro thi* Uwlvmlty f (fentbriilw tit
n Miurch. 10, By tfo Rt(cht

doming- of GurlHt,
the
of
.

AtmK

Iff
t

BHQU

ftbrujry

BluIwpofKJy,

CAMBRtDGE

flyo,

ITairmity CalendAr, 1808*

(Br. W.

HO

4i.

ftf.

Nature and Off**

BRIGHTON, BELL, AND

00.

CHBVAIAIEB's

(T.) Translation of iihe Epistles of Olemenl


and JMiatiUB ; and of the Apologies of JuriSx
Sf iS?* jFSWJl
d
JJjrtJ*
JCwtugan ; wtth an fciteoduction and Bnef Notes din*
te*tft of toe BocleriaBttoal Hurtory of the Rrst Two Oentnrjfta.

T, CarviLUKfi, B,D,

tfwond

Bj

jfttoton.

12*

STO,

COOPER'S faH, and THOMPSON) Athenae


0. tf.
By

COOPSB,

P S.A M andTnowBOM

Cantabrigienses,

COOPBB, F.8.A.

Thin work, in illustration of the biography of notable and enunem


men who have been members of the TJniveiaty of Cambridge, com
1,
Authors
2
IB, noticow of
Cardinals, archbiflhops
, ftblmts, heads of religious houses and other Ohuxoh digm>'

an4 wafetot pnurtitfonAre prSe filvxl or SSSonlaw


6~
.^_, , j imd poliUoal oplBioofl.

4. JTndftH

ftf

&

to,

twoo.

7.

Etttowt

ttraotitloMw ^ 8. Arturta, murtoiMiB, an


collcgeR, profeMorv, and principal officers of the tugTctnity. 10. BenoCaoton to the uniYerslty and colleges or to the
public at largo.
al

Keadn of

Volume 1

1600-1585. Sro. 0Jpa,

Volume

DINOLE's

(B^v,

J.)

III.

Volume

18*

II. 1880

1609,

18*

InthePrest.

Harmony

of Revelation and Science.

Thwlo/oal Qtujtionfl of tha Day, BytlwB^,


Hertrt of KMftra
op
Dtwit3 ldU,r tf,A.&L., liwtunbwt of LanohMl^ri Dtirhaa. Grow*
J,
8TO

W.

DONALDSON'S

.)

The Theatre of
J,

the Greeks.

the Greek Dian:


W-towiXMo^ B B

fttttott of

A
wi

Scholarship and Olasaical Learning


ttomda^tcd with cupoolal roforonoo to dbmpotitlte Tests andTJnrreri$
rnwtiwil Iffluia? on Ubetal Education
By the

W.

LIST OF

ELLIS

(BOBBRT

WOBK8 PUBLISHED BY

LESLIE).

Tho Mathematical and other

WrittaKH of HOBRUT tai,ih KJ.MB, M.A , Mlow of Trinity dnlliMft


wir, M, A., Trinity (Mlws with
CambrirtK*. Edltpd by WILLUK
A BloKrauhioal Memoir by the Very Reverend UAUVKT (JtX)J>Wiw, IK I),,
10*.
8vo
DeottofKly, Portrait.

EWALD's

(H.) Life of Jeans (Jhriab


By U.
by OOTAVIUS OLOVXB, U.IX Crown 8vo, 0,

PRAKCTS
iuoh

(Bar. JOHN),

and
w Oouraw
n

EwiU>,

" The Bbcoroi^ of the Aottat

Edited

Tlrtuw.,

ratrltrtlwu, !. tntlrtlyoaxiHlftfnt with the Hplrft


of the Oortpol ;
brinff the liurnty IMxc KMhuy frr I
By the ftv.
'
J(itN FitANcrs, IV A,, Vic<>*Prin< l|iul of Itihhap OIUT'H Truinlng < ollfK* lt

wa

<

Bvo.

Book

[Bir. J. M.)
By tta

of Uanlel
HTO,

ITUIU^SO,

2&

or,

Bwav on
Boy,

ft*.

J^saget from tho Lifo of LUDWIO VON


FromtlwOcrauw,

GOODWIN'S

tho Authmitimty of iho

/ X. Fvi-iaa, M,A., flt Juhn'it

KmiOiam

(**.

(DBA*) Doctrine* and Difficult^ of the (!hri.tmn

luaiKlon oontomplAted ftom tlw Btan<iiitff-p<rtrvt umiutKl t>> tto<


Doctrine of tho ftta* of our txira Jcnun OlirU, it4nff tUn
Lootoro* to the
1W5, By U. GOODWIH, 0, D* HruT fto.

(thur

yr

'The Glory of the Only Begotten of tho


IWng thftJjtttom Uotum

wcmlatlieMuihoo<loruiiri^'

i;j;.

Umo.

tor tlu

64.

Srd Swte,

Stoontt

Praftw iw
imtUif' Y

DEIGHTON, BELL, AND

GOODWIN'S

00.

CDBijr) Ponr Sermons preached he&re the TJni*


in the Season of A&rant, 18M. By H GOOJTON,

TOtty

QfCwxtod|^

Christ in the Wilderness. Four Sermon* preached


in the month of February, 185(1.

Wore Hie University of Cambridge


By H. GOODWW, D,D. 12m it.

Short Sermons at the Celebration of the Lord's


GOODWIN, DJ> JiTew Edition 12nu>.

ByH

Supper

Church Catechism.

Lectures upon the


GOODWIN, D.D, ifcno. 4*.

Guide to the Parish Chnrch.


6d elotA.
GOOJWH, D,D. Price 1, swd ;

By H.

By

Being a Book of Instruction

Confirmation Day.

for Young Persons turn they ought to spend that solemn day. o
thoy rttw the Vow* of their Baptifin- and we oontrmed hyme
trlth ptwor and the Iflying on of haute
By E. QOOD^W,

the meaning"of
HftokfcM

Tlw Worthy Cb&^tiiuGant f

Ihe Doom of

Sin,

'

ot,

',

and the Inspiration of the

^KwaePritow,

By

BJJITBT GOODWTN, D.D

Hands, Head, and Heart; or the Christian BeIWoft wgtwdM PrudtoftUy, Jnteaectouaiy, a^ DevofapnaDy,
Renoowi proachod before the Ottraatfy of damhndge. By

GOODVIH,

D J)

Foap, STO,

2,

64.

LIST OF

GOODWIN'S

WORKS PUBLISHED BY

(PKAH) Tho Appearing of Jeans

Chrisfc.

A ahorfc

Trwtiw by STKON PATRICK, l)^., fbrmorly Lord BUhnp of My, now


publMiod 'for thp fiwt time from the Orlwtaal MS. &MHt by tho
I>J,AN oy JSwr.

oB on tho Goapela, intended for the


Header, and udApteft either for Danawrtio or J?riv*t* Uo
By
AAVN v (JooDWiw, I). D, Crown 8ro.
H.

_. On tlio Imitation of Ohrint. A


By the DKAN oi" KI.Y. fr'tond Kdittoti Iflmo,

Pi'Alt,

Hvo.

An Kdltlou

iinntfd

tin.

Now
3r

Translation.

Hr/.

r/Aiu.u I'Ai-int, TM

FAUQUHAKSON),

Tho

DUKCAW FAWH/UABHOM <}HKtiOUY, M.A M latr Ki*Ucw


KtUtctl liy WU.UAM WM.-KIH, W.A.,
Ckilh-jfo, OamUri^,
With tv Ui jrwihif ut M* m<iir
cjHi,mv UwnbrW^.
of

ItSnity
Trinity

<m MctU-m InWIwtu


ofMor*llhiloiK>pby.

(AEOKDXAOOK) History of the Article of

To which

in tultlMi

u,

Wfrtw of JTtoeuinMjt* from A

A.

H<i-

JWW

to

wlttt

HUMPHIty 8
r

flflfcr*

V.

^i*fe ^2*
OoH

ofTntttty
nttlftll

pOflt nVf/

KKNT'tf Commentary on International Law.


i

LAMB -(Esv. Joiur).


-

doini to ttai

Th* HWMI Word

HwM,

with

DEIGHTON, BBLL,

LEAO's

AJSTL 00.

The Topography of Athens, with some


^S^lMkon Two vok too^S*.

(CotoffEL),
ranatkajm

fejUfpty

Travels ia Northern flreeoe.

Pom: vok, 8vo. witt

Mapi^ g

Peloponnesiaoa, a Supplement to Travels in the


Morea ELTO Haps. By COLONEL LSAXH. (Pub. at 15*.) 7*. 6d.

On Some

a Map of Africa.

Disputed QaestJons in Geography,


By COLOJTBL LEHB. (Pal), at 6, 8<) 44, At.

Ntuniemata HeTlenica.
dix, completing a Desonptive
Coins, with. Notes Geographical

witL.

COLQNBL LsAxa. 4to

LEAPINGWELL's

and

(Pub at 68.) 42,

(DE. G.) Manual of the

wifii

and Appen-

Thousand Chraek
Map, and Tndeg. By

Roman Civil Lav,

arranged according to the Syllabus of Dr. Hiixmx By G LaimaVBIL, XiL D. Dengned for the use of Studeats in the Umyecsitiee azid
8vo
12i.

LK1TB1S

-Leofrnree.
(Ds,) Oambri
to
J tiie jBtev Ptofwsor BTOOVIOK, M.A.,

LTVINQSTOOT's
r

tietbw

'

).

Memoir of the

late.

By

and an pngraTBd

Tlw Large Paper Edition may still be had,

at Oxford

I9mo

from

price lOi, 6d.

E.) Twelve Sermons preached


tjrciLOfBtMary

the BSJLJ?
P<xrtratt

oix

Yarions

LIST OP

WORKS PUBLISHED BY

(B*r, T. B.) Annotations on tho Ad* of th


Apotlw. Original and neteftwt 1>PMM<*1 lutnrtottlljr A* t*w w* *
CtutdidttM for the Or<Unury 11. A. ]>wn*, HtucUiiKtor Holy (mta*
&ot) wltU Ot.Utw ami BfiitMl<nu KinmUifttton I'm***. By ttw

MASKEW'e

,A,

MILL'S (REV. DR.)

4towid

JWtlm,

cMttrtrt.

fa*

to,

Observations on tlm attempted Appli^tion

of PuntheJHtlo IMnoiplf* to tta Theory mid IlUtorto Ctttfc'kni of


nft- i),U,, late ftoiriun i^^tur of
Qwraeli, By W.
vf/A^ >I^
tiM 6nltSftyof Cambridw. S^mrf
Ki oiil^cw.
by hi* lAo^in-law, th K*r, l\ t

^W

aM

Mid

o^

thit

Looturos on the Catochifltn. Delivorod in th>


Church of Knuttcd, In the Dlocpw of r^iti'rliMry,
y W, Et<
D.D. EkllUxIbythcKov, 13. Wwai^.A. ftup' N w. 0*. tU,

BormonB preaohod in Lent IMS* and cm (wontl former


Uy W,

Four Sonnoiw prcmohod


Fifth,

.....

of

Norember

nU

tlio

Mti.i,,

ti.

Ixiforo tbu TFnivt^n*ity on (h


Huttdayn itn'MtliiiK Atlvrm, in rlw

thwo

An

AnalyftiK of Uio Kxi^Hiiion of tho dmNl, written


tU-vrrml ftthcr lit OtMt, J. PKAIlMtX, tUl,,
<:otaplcd, ^ It h urttiM' mtUKhrtut R
lntr^nwl t far tbr u< of Kt^tftu of Ltt^^'
It
at).
rA/rd AWi/.^, rtflmi
W,
wr
Miu*
By

by Uie

Ktfrht

Bishop of Chrafc'r.

w&

MISSION

LTFti

amoi

MOEHlff (Jo0w) Word*

tho

Zula-Kaflm.

of Comft>rt

fiir

tlu*

Mm^

of

Wnyfcr<irt fto

BRIGHTON, BELL, AND 00.

PEARSON'S

(Rsv. J. B.) The Divino Ptewmdtty, being a


Conmderatlcm of the \rgnmenta to prove that the Author of Nature Is
a Being endued with liberty and choice. Tho Buniey Prlae fibsay for
1M4, By 3 B, PMKMN, B,A , Hcholor of Ht, JoUnB College/and
Curate of Ht Michael's Church, Cambridge,

8vo.

10, fcf ,

PIEROTTJ'H (EEMETE) Jerusalem Explored being a Descrip:

tion of the Anefont and Modmi City, with upwatdn of One Hundred
TlhiHtratlorw, cnnHiHting of Vlmm, Qround-plan f and AeotionH
By
Ktmi:T PIKHOTTT, Doctor of MttthomutlcR, (^ntitn of the Corni of
KnKiUrtTH IA th< ttnny of Hnrdinla, Aichitoct-Kntfibocr to hi* Ex
Hooruya Puaha of JoruwilMu, and ArohiUMit of tlui Holy Land

Tlio Cuntomfl fttid Traditions of Palostino Oomth* B(bk, from OlwmitHon* mode daring A it^ldimoo of
By Dr. BKXKTK PUBKKTX, Auttwr of "JeruwOom

naml with
falj(ht

TimrB.

TO.

PHILLIPB* (Rnv.

01*

GBO.) Short Bermon

on Old ToetAraent

M*lanifl I'cits pmMhcd in ttu* Ohaptl of Qtimw' OoUaff,X^nibridM,


By Uw Jftw, OKO, liuiM D.D., l>mklentof tHe OoIlagA. Bro. U.

PSALTER

(Tlie)

or TValmg of Drna in EnKlUhVero.


Ay * Hmuter of tho UnJvwtity

ami KoU*.

to the

B'$

(.

H.)

Lmi

!M

of

ttty,

With

JPtah Inte>aw*ten to Ih* Oritjotam ol

LIST OF

10

HCJUVENER'8(F.

H.)

Itwlvrd

UI-IH with the

nHlxwl a CritM

Full Collation of tho Codex Rind-

TW

Intioduotioa.

N'W

th*

l\y V.

il,

'IVtnmr,nt: to which

Hnuvuwu,

,ftlA.

in

Pup,

3#.

Bvo,
'

WOBKB PUBLISHED BY

Mr, Htrtiwnrr him now plwwl thti iwiUN of TlwhrtuIorfX cllwinwry


within tilt* ttwh of ull m A riuniiutK little volume, ^hicti <mtrhl to
the <rwk Ti^Uiiidit ui the Mbrury
' of <t\*

An

Kauri

Tmnwnpl

of tlu'(tni>nx

AriKNKr.

MwtMwtrlpt in t'nrinl Irtfrv* ttf H. I'/mtV


In th^ lirturnry f Trmlty (' t ,!!', <HimtiHafi
To nhui 1,
T
Unfion itf Mfty Mnntivrltt*i roriMlnlntt v,num |NirtlntiH
wlilwt w Full
of lh* <iH'*k NY* 'IV.t.iuunt ilnmifi*l in f iiHlnli Lili^iiit'^ with

nm^

full

f'nlUMl liilrodmtuMU

ll>

I''

It.

*ikm;%Hi, M,A

lU.y.il lu<i

ttfi '.

TUi

<

ni*'

^.

Novum

Tiwlnim-nium Urn^itii Tf'rttw Ktn*tlmtl*-^

H.

I*

VrtlHit*i#p,t far jftfut

JAt|tttlu<,
,

KUlttll

MM*

If

I/",

M.

hi
I'MfJ

in
ilM,

OrWoftln
|

Centra (VUuni,

K,f

fl

T/ttmr

I.

in Vri^rxw Ti^ttnirrtt** t**pt

DBTOHTON, BELL, AND

CO,

11

SINKER'S (REV. R.) The Charactorfotie Difference* betwwm


the IkwkM of tht* N c* TfttMiicnttiul ihf unufcllftit'ly prccttlinfr^C'wUti,
r

GtuMUn Utt'iutuw, crm*irUtnfl MM tui


Ikuzitf tiw
evidence of the IHviiw Authority <if tlio New ToHtatncut
for
I'nin'
1MM,
TJulH'nn
h<"uiy
By tlw* Itrv R. HiMCfcn, Trinity t
and the lmau*dUlf4jr Muvwdbig

HmallHm

STUDKNT'S (JUIDK

(Tho) to

Umvormty of

thft

Keup.Hvo.
f

fntnuluHltni f h> J. It

wn'H, ty

tltr

Urr

II.

Srru vf MA
<n thf
r

fAin\M, M,\,

On thi* (Vtiir^
rittiftY, M.A.
Trlixw, by tht JU v, U, I}I*HN, M, A, 1^1 th Court* of rUf*rtio r frir
(to
M.
.!>,
the* MntYMttMflnd Trtitni, Hs tbr ItftV.
*Iir MnNl
ttH'C'rmr... r^f KtwliitK
Trljx^, br thr K^v,
by

J-

it.

W,
H(|H^

('*%

t^ NutMnU
Mvvoi,, M,\, <m llr ffmr* nf Kiwilwt
Trip*! h> l^tittr^ir I.i>t'iN^, M,A. On Law MmiUn ftttrt
rmfr,Mifr J.T, Am*, M,I>. -Mid^U Xhwlf utwt
, III Mi<tmv t M,l.
JItnoi,ii Ilmtwwr,
dvll Htrvkr nt ImU'u^y tin Hv. It, tiAifU t
KxrfiuitmttiMt,* of th( Cui^i>it,v by 11 J. f

4,

Hf<rvlr',-MniUil

Ammut

f the

M^

Tim

AwJ^y

or

u I^AIIHS littHit|l n4 on
dwtimt t< tin- Miu.Iy nf l^trUkiit ytMt K"l,^tiii4Hi Utmlty.
I
4
AVY0'{
ft* M.
M/I'IUM
ttvi,
ri.l>.
A,
U*
Wwimuft,

Wlih

tulliuit

Fi^rti<h N<t*r* iiut

'

TODD'fl (HKV. J,

P.)

Thn

Aiionllo

Paul tmd

tlio

Au

(Jhtm-li of ri.lUpt.l,
K*p*wUiun CHt.ml MV! IrHrilcJ tl thf
tecntli rtuiptrr Tif thi^ Art. ir tlii'sUwHrtt^ nii(j of tU^ Kr^Htlm to
Ut
tar. J. F. Totn., M,A, t
ruilmphmH. My

tw

TURTON'n ([jrnor) Tho

Tloly Cnthollc Doctrine of


to (tr, Wl^mmi'j* AwrnitNtt fhi

*>,

ml Transom
WATBRT/XX

ttw

Tnnhy

1t

r
"

ft.

HI,

tlir

wl|t*

n /.

0,

U
of tha Four

'*

(d

A.)

P*Hh
Yrw,

ti^Oltffciiw

Hifrnwni*

By tlw U*>

tfe

woonHnif to UM <>r4tr of
A. Wmi^J^A, BOtttdVyJ, K.

WOIIKH prni.wiiKn

UrilKWKiil/H
IWH, H,

(Ui,v, Dr.)
IKiv

ito-

tWdlilu*.

Ktaumte of Mimd'to,

W. ttmrni,

I).,

frrrA/>W<*u,iiiit<ii, sto.

|ji*(*tiHY<i

H'ftM

<,u

including

Mi.tor of fatally rtaUiw,


Ifo,

on tlw History of Moral Philowphy


H l>. A'

llw W. WururM,,
<t>i't*'*'.nir> /.nfwn A,

IV

rht\n>

imnamiN, UKLU &

IIY

!to<

diDMiirr

pliuttfl

wlih hn\"

{mrrh^Hl

thr

tornur Ivutlon

ilcri'fl

nM
,1,1

S'

ttn.

mum*

.'
*J*'"I>

'

'^

c,i*

,t<

(Uuv. il)

WIN WMI,

tty

tw

Mfi^n,

WIU, JAMS'

'"Mi,Vvi of

(V

?M

^V

Vf*>

Aroint ttir.il ilitlnr


MIMI
ft ',, J^M'.^hn
1

AUi

II

ir.t^

i,

rulUl Umiin.v

A.K

11*)

NM* ami

AtW tbn

MiHs4*,
ti*,

(A.

4,

<fti>. *75iV

rU'>wt,vM*) UuioMiHi lirMlm.^


<

tW*"',<

frm f^*.

Di*wrruwtm

Mimi

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen